Editorial: Style Guide

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 189

WO R L D B A N K GROUP P U B LICA T IO N S

EDITORIAL STYLE GUIDE


2020
WORLD BANK GROUP PUBLICATIONS

EDITORIAL STYLE GUIDE


2020
© 2020 International Bank for Reconstruction and Development / The World Bank
1818 H Street NW
Washington DC 20433
Telephone: 202-473-1000
Internet: www.worldbank.org

This work is a product of the staff of The World Bank with external contributions. The findings, interpretations, and
conclusions expressed in this work do not necessarily reflect the views of The World Bank, its Board of Executive
Directors, or the governments they represent.

The World Bank does not guarantee the accuracy of the data included in this work. The boundaries, colors,
denominations, and other information shown on any map in this work do not imply any judgment on the part of
The World Bank concerning the legal status of any territory or the endorsement or acceptance of such boundaries.

Rights and Permissions

The material in this work is subject to copyright. Because The World Bank encourages dissemination of its knowl-
edge, this work may be reproduced, in whole or in part, for noncommercial purposes as long as full attribution to this
work is given.

Any queries on rights and licenses, including subsidiary rights, should be addressed to World Bank
Publications, The World Bank Group, 1818 H Street NW, Washington, DC 20433, USA; fax: 202-522-2625; e-mail:
[email protected].

Editor: Mary Fisk


Cover and interior design: Yaneisy K. Martinez / World Bank.

The icons used on the front and back covers and repeated in the interior were created by the following artists from
The Noun Project (thenounproject.com), with the exception of two, as noted.
1

15 6
16 5
18 19 2 3
17 4
21 9
20 23 7 10
22 8

25 26 1 11 12 13
24 14

Icons were designed by artists from The Noun Project: 1: Ayub Irawan; 2: Davo Sime; 3: Nick Abrams; 4: corpus
delicti; 5 Adrien Coquet; 7: Alice Design; 8: Nithinan Tatah; 10: Delwar Hossain; 11: Alena Artemova; 12: Wilson
Joseph; 13: Gregor Cresnar; 14: Adrien Coquet; 15: Lemon Liu; 16: Gagana; 17: Xela Ub; 18: Gregor Cresnar; 19: OCHA
Visual; 20: OCHA Visual; 21: Vicente Arenas Pinto; 22: iconoci; 23: b farias; 24: OCHA Visual; 25: Adrien Coquet; 26:
OCHA Visual. Further permission required for reuse.

Icons 6 and 9 were created by Three Spot Media for the World Bank’s Human Development Network:
The two icons are part of a set based on the United Nations’ eight Millennium Development Goals (MDGs).
The wheat icon (6) symbolizes the MDG to end hunger; the trees icon (9) symbolizes the MDG to protect the
environment. Overall, the icons on our cover were chosen to highlight the wide variety of MDGs, the 17 Sustainable
Development Goals (SDGs), and the World Bank’s Global Practices. The background’s honeycomb motif, in a
happy coincidence, echoes the 9th SDG goal to “build resilient infrastructure, promote inclusive and sustainable
industrialization, and foster innovation.” As for the firefly, one might consider it as a symbol of biodiversity—or
simply a meta-reference to the collective look of the icons on the cover.
CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION 1
Publishing Categories 2
Premium Publishing 2
Basic Publishing Stream 2
Knowledge Publishing Stream 2
2. THE EDITORIAL PROCESS 3
Managing the Editorial Process 4
Text 5
Figures and Other Pictorial Elements 6
Math 7
Tables 7
Editing 8
Text 8
Figures and Other Pictorial Elements 10
Math 10
Tables 10
Proofreading 11
3. PARTS OF THE BOOK 12
4. PERMISSIONS 14
5. PUNCTUATION 16
Ellipses 16
Commas 16
Colons and Semicolons 17
Question Marks 17
Hyphens and Dashes 17
Parentheses and Brackets 17
Slashes 18
Lists 18
6. URLs, DOIs, AND EMAIL ADDRESSES 20
7. WORD TREATMENT 21
Names 21
The World Bank Group 21

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 iii


Organizations Other Than the World Bank 24
Personal Names 24
Place Names 24
Brand Names 25
Titles of Works 25
Terms 27
Word Division 28
8. ABBREVIATIONS 29
9. NUMBERS AND MEASUREMENTS 31
Punctuation and Inclusive Numbers 32
Physical Quantities 32
Percentages, Decimal Fractions, and Ratios 32
Money 32
Dates 33
10. QUOTATIONS 35
Treatment 35
Punctuation 35
11. TEXT HEADINGS 37
12. TEXT BOXES 38
13. FIGURES AND MAPS 40
Titles 41
Unit Indicators 41
Composition 41
Sources 42
Notes 44
Maps 45
Photographs 45
Checklist and Examples for Figures 46
14. TABLES 55
Titles 56
Unit Indicators 56
Column Heads 56
Stub Entries 57
Table Body 57
Sources 58
Notes 58
15. MATHEMATICS 60
Displayed Equations 60
Punctuation 61
Editing Mathematics 61
16. DOCUMENTATION 62
Documentation System: Source Citations 62
Reference Lists and Bibliographies 63
Content 63
Examples 65
17. INDEXES 73

iv World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


APPENDIXES
A.1 Editorial Checklists for Levels of Editing (A, B, C) 75
A.2a Sample Style Sheet (blank) 81
A.2b Sample Style Sheet (actual) 83
A.3 Microsoft Word Formatting Instructions 85
A.4 Document Cleanup Instructions for Copyeditors 90
A.5 Frequently Overlooked Style Rules for Editors and Proofreaders 93
A.6 Author’s Checklist for Formal Publishing 95
A.7 Manuscript Preparation Guidelines 98
A.8 Editorial Quality Control Checklist 106
A.9 Excel Figure Preparation Guidelines 113

B.1 Proofreading Checklist for Categories 1 and 2 117


B.2 Adobe Acrobat Instructions and Examples 121
B.3 Sample Copyright Page 126

C Country, Economy, and Territory Names 127


D Currency Units 134
E Common Abbreviations 140
F Names and Terms 146
G Alternative Words and Phrases 158
H World Bank Map Guidelines 162
I International Standards Organization (ISO) Codes 167

Index 173

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 v


1. INTRODUCTION

The World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide is an essential reference
for manuscript editors (substantive and mechanical editors), proofreaders, and
production editors. It is a supplement to other editorial references, in particular,
The Chicago Manual of Style (annual subscription available online), 17th edition,
and Merriam-Webster’s Collegiate Dictionary, 11th edition. It focuses on issues
specific to the World Bank/International Bank for Reconstruction and Development
(IBRD) or for which Chicago provides multiple options.

The professional recommendations made in the guide are designed to meet the
following objectives:

• To ensure that every publication achieves a standard of professionalism


appropriate for the World Bank and on par with the publications of similar
organizations

• To ensure stylistic consistency, primarily within individual publications and


secondarily across all World Bank publications

• To increase efficiency by eliminating the need to repeatedly address the same


stylistic details for every publication.

Adjustments may be made for individual publications to address client needs or to


accommodate styles established prior to manuscript editing. Such adjustments should
be incorporated throughout the publication, should not introduce errors, should be
considered acceptable in scholarly publishing, and should be noted on a style sheet.

The 2020 edition has new and updated information throughout its pages, and we
encourage readers to review the entire document. The more significant changes
include the following:

• It incorporates updated information on the requirements for style preferences,


source information, treatment of lists, and word treatments.

• It revises the respective section numbering to conform to the Chicago Manual of


Style, 17th edition, the default style.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 1


• It provides new map information, guidance, and changes in some country names.
• It has revised appendixes to provide the latest information on checklists, Excel
and Word and Acrobat use, manuscript preparation for authors, currencies,
country and economy names, names and terms, and the International Standards
Organization codes.
• It has revisions to reference styles: the use of the three-em dash for second and
subsequent entries by the same author has been discontinued; the author’s
name should be used in every case. If there are two or more references for an
author that have the same year of publication, then editors will use “a” and “b”
to distinguish them in text (for example, 2019a and 2019b); in the reference list,
editors will put the two entries in alphabetical order by title.
• It stipulates that all figures, maps, photographs, and tables require source lines.
• It reminds editors and proofreaders that an initial A-level subhead, for example,
“Introduction”, is required at the beginning of each chapter.
• It reports the formatting change from using italics for non-English words or
phrases to using roman fonts.

PUBLISHING CATEGORIES

The World Bank’s Formal Publishing Program publishes products in the following
categories:

Premium Publishing

Category 1: Annual Corporate, Regional, and Sectoral Flagships


This category encompasses key annual flagship publications, including the World
Development Report, Doing Business, and the Latin American and Caribbean
Studies series. Publications in this category undergo rigorous internal and external
review; are made available in print and various electronic formats; and are
­disseminated globally to commercial and free channels, including Amazon, ­Google
Books, and the Open Knowledge Repository.

Category 2: Regional/Sectoral Peer-Reviewed Series and Practitioner Manuals


These publications represent high-priority, high-quality research output or
­operational practice of the World Bank. Publications in this category undergo
rigorous internal and external review; are made available in print and various
electronic formats; and are disseminated globally to commercial and free channels,
including Amazon, Google Books, and the Open Knowledge Repository.

Basic Publishing Stream


These publications result primarily from the World Bank’s advisory services and
analytics (ASA). Systematic Country Diagnostics and high-level World Bank action
plans may also be published in this stream. Publications in this category are
disseminated mainly as ebooks, with print books provided through regional
print-on-demand hubs. They are included in the World Bank eLibrary and the Open
Knowledge Repository.

Knowledge Publishing Stream


This stream is designed to provide an efficient, effective, and low-cost approach to
capturing and disseminating the substantive knowledge that results from the World
Bank’s considerable analytical work. It is especially geared toward short, narrowly
focused papers that will not be formally published.

2 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


2. THE EDITORIAL PROCESS

2.1 The editorial process defined. The editorial process c­ omprises


­manuscript editing (substantive and mechanical editing) and
­proofreading. These tasks are described from the perspectives of the
­production ­editor (­sections 2.5–29), manuscript editor (sections 2.30–45),
and proofreader (sections 2.46–51). Typesetting is covered to the extent
that it relates to these functions. The designing and indexing processes
are not discussed.

2.2 Manuscript editing defined. Manuscript editing occurs after the writing and
developmental editing phases have been completed and the manuscript has
entered production. It consists of a substantive or a mechanical edit, or a
combination of the two. For more information about manuscript editing, refer
to sections 2.30–45 and Chicago 2.48–67, 2.72, and 2.78–89.
Fact-checking is the responsibility of the authors; however, manuscript editors
should query obvious errors (Chicago 2.56).
Manuscript editing includes cleanup of the electronic files before and after
editing and preparation of those files for typesetting or other conversion.
Appendix A.1 of this style guide lists specific editorial tasks for levels A, B,
and C. Appendixes A.2a and A.2b are Sample Style Sheets. Appendixes A.3
and A.4 offer guidance on document formatting and provide additional instruc-
tions for postediting document cleanup. Appendix A.5 is Frequently
Overlooked Style Rules for Editors and Proofreaders. Appendix A.6 is the short
Author’s Checklist for Formal Publishing. Appendix A.7 is the longer guidance
document, with Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for editors preparing the
final files for submission. Appendix A.8 is the Editorial Quality Control
Checklist. Appendix A.9 is the Excel Figure Preparation Guidelines.

2.3 Proofreading defined. Proofreading occurs after the pages have been typeset
or have gone through an electronic conversion process. It typically consists

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 3


of an editorial proofread rather than a word-for-word comparison proofread.
Appendix B.1 is the Proofreading Checklist for Categories 1 and 2.
­Appendix B.2 provides guidance on marking indicated changes
using Adobe Acrobat.

For more information about proofreading, refer to sections 2.46–51 and


Chicago 2.100, 2.103–107, and 2.110–140. Chicago 2.116 allows orphans but
not widows.

Do not include instructions to the typesetter to make global changes.

2.4 The editorial team. The people described in this section are involved in the
manuscript editing and proofreading processes. The processes described apply
to manuscripts submitted for production.

WORLD BANK
Client
May be the author(s), volume editor(s), or a person coordinating the process on
behalf of the author(s) or editor(s); provides the original manuscript, then
reviews and approves the edited manuscript and page proofs; communicates
primarily with the production editor

Production editor
Manages the production process; communicates with the client, editor,
typesetter, and proofreader

VENDORS AND CONSULTANTS


Manuscript editor
Edits the original manuscript, reviews and incorporates revisions provided by
the client and production editor, and prepares the manuscript files for typeset-
ting; communicates with the production editor

Typesetter
Lays out the book and incorporates hardcopy edits to figures and math, as
well as to any tables edited on hard copy; communicates with the produc-
tion editor

Proofreader
Reviews at least first page proofs and frequently second page proofs; may
compile changes from the client and production editor; communicates with the
production editor

MANAGING THE EDITORIAL PROCESS (production editor)

2.5 Materials to be provided to the manuscript editor. The production editor


provides the manuscript editor with an introductory letter with the schedule
and deliverables and formats, the electronic files for the manuscript, a
sample publication upon request, an editorial checklist, and a style sheet if
one exists.

The production editor also answers the following questions:

• How many rounds of client review are expected to occur?

4 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


• Will work proceed on a flow basis?
• Should the figures be edited before the text?
• Should the copyeditor follow the preferred style for headings, which
requires headline-style capitalization?
• Which manuscript elements should appear in the table of contents? Section
3.2 lists the preferred list of elements to include in the table of contents, but
the production editor may find a simple listing of chapter titles and authors
sufficient if the manuscript is a multiauthor work.

2.6 Materials to be provided to the typesetter. The production editor provides the
typesetter with the clean manuscript files and the following:
• Edits of figures, maps, and uneditable tables: These should be typed into
the electronic file as instructions to the typesetter. These edited files may be
sent in advance of the text files.
• Schedule
• Typesetting transmittal form and composition guidelines, including instruc-
tion on the placement of notes and references if different from the default of
chapter placement for these elements

• Template

• Editorial style sheet.

In a few cases, the production editor may arrange for the manuscript editor to
send the edited files and hard copy directly to the typesetter.

2.7 Materials to be provided to the proofreader. The production editor provides


the proofreader with the following:

• Proofreading checklist

• Page proofs in the form of electronic PDFs

• Sample publication

• Schedule
• Style sheet

• Any hardcopy edits of figures, maps, and tables.


If the proofreading is on a flow basis, the production editor will provide a
working table of contents and a working style sheet (see appendixes A.2a
and A.2b of this guide). For any reviews after first page proofs, the production
editor will provide the foul proofs to the proofreader.

Text

2.8 Transmission of the edited manuscript to the client. The manuscript editor
provides two versions of the edited manuscript to the production editor:
• A redlined PDF in which all changes have been tracked
• A clean Word document in which all edits have been accepted.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 5


Upon receiving both sets of files, the production editor sends both the PDFs and
the clean Word documents to the client with any accompanying graphics files,
for reference.

2.9 Client review. The client makes tracked changes in the clean Word document, refer-
ring to the PDF as necessary to view the changes made by the manuscript editor.

2.10 Transmission of revisions to the editor. The production editor adds his or her own
changes, if any, to those of the client and sends the tracked Word file to the
manuscript editor, who will edit the changes and prepare the file for typesetting.

2.11 Rounds of review during the editorial phase. Typically, only one round of client
review occurs during the editorial phase. However, some books may require
additional rounds of review. The production editor should provide this informa-
tion to the manuscript editor at the start of the project or as soon as the need for
additional rounds becomes evident.

2.12 Transmission of the edited files to the typesetter. Upon receiving the clean,
edited files from the manuscript editor, the production editor performs a cursory
review and then sends the files to the typesetter.

2.13 Page proof circulation. The typesetter provides page proofs to the production
editor as PDFs. The production editor forwards the page proofs, with any
accompanying hardcopy edits, to the client and proofreader for review.

2.14 Page proof revisions. The client and the proofreader use Adobe Acrobat to make
revisions electronically.

2.15 Compilation of changes. The production editor reviews the client’s and proof-
reader’s changes and compiles a master set of revisions.

2.16 Transmission of changes to the typesetter. The production editor sends the
compiled master set of changes to the typesetter, who incorporates all changes
and provides revised page proofs.

2.17 Rounds of review during the proofreading phase. Typically, two rounds of client
review occur: the first as described in sections 2.13–14, and the second for final
approval before printing (refer to section 2.18). However, some projects may
require more rounds of review.
The proofreader sees one round of page proofs at a minimum and might be
asked to check corrections in the revised page proofs. The production editor will
provide the latest PDFs and the previous proofs.

2.18 Final approval. The production editor provides final or almost final pages to the
client for approval. Once approval has been received and the production editor
has ensured that the typesetter has incorporated all changes, the files are
collected and provided to the print coordinator for conversion.

Figures and Other Pictorial Elements

2.19 Transmission of edits to the typesetter. Upon receiving the edited figures or
other pictorial elements from the manuscript editor, the production editor

6 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


forwards them to the typesetter. The edits may be sent either in advance of or
with the text, depending on the production editor’s instructions at the start of
the project.

2.20 Typesetting. The typesetter creates the figures or other pictorial elements,
concurrently incorporating the editorial changes, and provides them to the
production editor as PDFs. They may be provided either in advance of the text
or as part of the first page proofs, depending on the production editor’s
instructions at the start of the project.

2.21 Review process. The remainder of the process is the same as that for text.
Refer to sections 2.13–18 of this guide. If the figures undergo one round of
review in advance of the text, the revised versions are placed in the first
page proofs.

2.22 Maps. Cartography must clear all maps furnished by the client before publica-
tion. Prior to printing, Cartography should also clear maps it created to ensure
that the typesetter did not inadvertently make any changes if the typesetter
worked in the map files.

Math

2.23 Transmission of edits to the typesetter. Upon receiving the edited math
from the manuscript editor, the production editor makes a scan or PDF.
The production editor then forwards the changes and the original for
­reference to the typesetter and keeps a copy for the proofreader. The client
does not review the edits at this stage.

2.24 Typesetting. The typesetter incorporates the editorial changes while creating
the first page proofs, which are provided to the production editor as PDFs.

2.25 Review process. The remainder of the process is the same as that for text. Refer
to sections 2.13–18 of this guide.

Tables

2.26 Word tables edited electronically. If the tables were edited electronically, the
production editor follows the process used for text. Refer to sections 2.8–18 of
this guide.

2.27 Transmission of hardcopy edits to the typesetter. Upon receiving the edited
tables from the manuscript editor, the production editor forwards them to the
typesetter.

2.28 Typesetting. The typesetter incorporates the editorial changes while


creating the first page proofs, which are provided to the production
editor as PDFs.

2.29 Review process. The remainder of the process is the same as that for text. Refer
to sections 2.13–18 of this guide.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 7


EDITING (manuscript editor)

2.30 Materials provided to the manuscript editor. The production editor provides
the manuscript editor with the following:
• Electronic files for the manuscript
• Sample publication upon request
• Editorial checklist
• Schedule
• Style sheet, if one exists.

The production editor also answers the following questions, as appropriate:


How many rounds of client review are expected to occur? Will work proceed
on a flow basis? Should the figures be edited before the text? Do headings
use the preferred headline-style capitalization? Which manuscript elements
should appear in the table of contents? Section 3.2 lists the preferred list of
elements to include in the table of contents, but the production editor may
find a simple listing of chapter titles and authors sufficient if the manuscript
is a multiauthor work.

2.31 File organization. Authors of books should submit manuscripts as


individual files: the front matter, chapters, and back matter. However,
if the manuscript is provided in one consolidated electronic file,
the manuscript editor should divide it into separate files prior
to editing.

2.32 Text boxes. Unless otherwise instructed by the production editor, the
manuscript editor should move any Word text box material from the
formatted box and into the main text. The manuscript editor should
add instructions to the typesetter that indicate such text material is a
text box by preceding the material with <<text box>> and following it
with <<end text box>>. The empty formatted Word text box can then
be deleted.

2.33 Graphics files and embedded graphics. Graphics should remain in place in the
Word files for reference. If the production editor needs to have the graphics
set up as separate files for editing independent of the text, he or she
will ­stipulate this. If the graphics are moved into separate files for copyedit-
ing, the files should be set up by chapter number, for example, “Chapter 1
graphics.”

Whichever option is chosen, the manuscript editor should always insert a


callout indicating where the graphic should appear (for example,
<<Insert ­figure 2.3 about here.>>).

Text

2.34 Editing. The manuscript editor makes changes in the electronic


­document using the tracking function; all changes should be tracked.
The production editor may request that basic formatting and
­tagging changes be made first with the tracking turned off to minimize
what the client will review, but this instruction will vary with the
­production editor.

8 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


2.35 Hyphenation. The editor should turn off automatic hyphenation during
manuscript editing. Only hard hyphens (that is, hyphens in compound words)
should be used. Refer to Chicago 2.13.

2.36 Queries. Author queries, in yellow highlight and double brackets, should be
placed within the text itself. The editor should not use the Comments feature in
Word.

Example

This weakness in the growth of private sector debt flows is unprecedented


in the post-2003 period (figure 1.3). [[AQ: Change to “post-2000 period”?
Figure 1.3 begins with 2001.]]

Queries for the production editor should be resolved before the edited
manuscript is provided for client review. Only author queries should appear in
the manuscript.

2.37 Provision of files. The manuscript editor sends the edited files to the production
editor either one chapter at a time or all at once when editing is completed,
depending on the production editor’s instructions at the start of the project.

The manuscript editor sends two versions of the edited manuscript to the
production editor:

• A redlined PDF in which all changes have been tracked

• A clean Word document in which all changes have been accepted and the
text files have been formatted according to the Microsoft Word Formatting
Instructions (appendix A.3 of this guide).

In addition, the manuscript editor provides all accompanying graphics files if


the graphics were duplicated and set up separate from the text files.

2.38 Client review. In most cases, one round of client review occurs during the
editorial phase. A few books may need additional review. The production
editor will provide this information at the start of the project or as soon as the
need for additional rounds becomes evident.

2.39 Revisions. The client makes tracked changes electronically in the clean version
of the edited manuscript and responds to queries. The production editor
forwards the client’s changes and comments to the manuscript editor.

2.40 Incorporation of revisions. Upon receiving the client’s revisions from the
production editor, the manuscript editor reviews and incorporates all changes,
prepares the files for typesetting (refer to the Document Cleanup Instructions
for Copyeditors in appendix A.4 of this guide for more information), and
provides the edited files to either the production editor or the typesetter,
depending on the instructions for the project.

The clean files should not contain any tracking. However, any outstanding or
new queries should be moved from the text to Comments so the production
editor and typesetter can see them easily.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 9


Figures and Other Pictorial Elements

2.41 Editing figures. The manuscript editor edits the figures electronically, typing
clear instructions for the typesetter directly below the figure.

2.42 Editing other pictorial elements. Any other pictorial elements, such as maps or
illustrations, should be edited the same way as figures.

Math

2.43 File format. Mathematical equations should be shown in the Word text files of
the manuscript or provided as PDFs in separate files to ensure accuracy as the
files are processed.

Editing math. The editor prints out the math (unless the production editor
provided hard copy), marks any changes on the hard copy, and sends the
edited hard copy to the production editor.

File organization. If the math is provided in a separate Math folder from the
manuscript, include a picture of the math in the manuscript file for reference.

File names. If a file contains multiple equations, include the chapter number or
appendix letter in the file name and label each equation by number within the
document.

Examples

01 Ch_1 Math.docx
02 Ch_2 Math.docx
08 App_A Math.docx

If each file consists of only one equation, identify the equation by number in
the file name and in the document.

Examples

Equation 1_1.xlsx
Equation 1_2.xlsx
Equation 2_1.xlsx

Tables

2.44 Editing Word tables. Tables created in Word or Excel can be edited electroni-
cally in accordance with the process described for text editing (refer to sections
2.34–40).
If electronic editing is not conducive to marking changes related to table
composition, the editor has two options: (a) insert instructions to the typesetter
directly into the Word file under the table, or (b) print out the tables and edit
the hard copy (refer to section 2.45).

2.45 Editing tables in formats other than Word or Excel. If the tables were created in
a program other than Word or Excel, editorial changes should be listed below
the table in the electronic file. This procedure includes tables imported into
Word as “pictures.” Editors should insert queries to authors to provide such
tables in editable format, if possible.

10 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


PROOFREADING (proofreader)

2.46 Materials provided to the proofreader. The production editor provides the
proofreader with a proofreading checklist, the page proofs in the form of
electronic PDFs, a sample publication, a schedule, and the style sheet. If the
proofreading is on a flow basis, the production editor will provide a working
table of contents and a working style sheet. For any reviews after first page
proofs, the proofreader will receive the foul proofs from either the production
editor or the typesetter.

2.47 Proofreading first page proofs. The proofreader performs a complete editorial
proofread in accordance with the proofreading checklist provided by the
production editor, verifies that any hardcopy edits were correctly incorporated
by the typesetter, and gets a sense of whether the entire manuscript seems to
be in place. In most cases, a word-for-word comparison proofread against the
edited manuscript is not necessary.

2.48 Revisions and queries. The preferred method for indicating needed changes
and queries is in Adobe Acrobat. Unless otherwise instructed by the produc-
tion editor, the proofreader should keep queries to a minimum. Changes
that fall within the scope of the proofreading checklist should be made without
querying. Any other changes should not be made unless a potentially embar-
rassing error is discovered.

2.49 Compilation of corrections. For some projects, the proofreader may be asked
to compile corrections. In these cases, the proofreader should mark client
revisions as “AA.”

2.50 Proofreading subsequent page proofs. The proofreader checks the revised
page proofs to ensure that the typesetter incorporated all corrections properly.
The proofreader may also be asked to perform a quality control check, for
which the production editor will provide a list of tasks. Revisions and queries
should be marked as indicated in section 2.48.

2.51 Proofreading the copyright page. The proofreader should not make text
changes on the copyright page unless a clear error is found; a sample page is
provided in appendix B.3 of this guide.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 11


3 . PA RT S O F T H E B O O K

3.1 List of book divisions. World Bank books may contain any or all of the following
elements. The elements should appear in the order and placement indicated
below unless the series template dictates otherwise.

FRONT MATTER
Half-title page (Note that the half-title page does not include any subtitle.) i
Series or cover information, list of prior publications, or blank ii
Title page iii
Copyright page iv
Contents v
Foreword (written by someone other than the author; optional) recto
Preface (written by the author; optional) recto
Acknowledgments (if not part of the preface; optional) recto
About the authors or editors or list of contributors (optional) recto
Introduction, overview, or executive summary (if not part of text) recto
Abbreviations recto or verso

TEXT
First text page (introduction, overview, executive summary,
chapter 1, or part title) 1 (recto)
Subsequent chapters with any respective annexes, notes,
or references recto or verso

BACK MATTER
First appendix recto
Subsequent appendixes recto or verso
Glossary (optional) recto
Bibliography (optional, in addition to references at the end
of each chapter) recto
Illustration credits (if not in captions or elsewhere) recto
Index (optional) recto

3.2 Table of contents. The following order should be applied to the table of
contents unless the series template dictates otherwise: chapter titles; chapter

12 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


authors (in multiauthor books); text headings (typically level A headings only);
listings of boxes, figures, maps, and tables. Delete any parenthetical words in
titles of figures, maps, and tables (for example, “(left)” or “(percent)”).

3.3 Chapter annexes and book appendixes. Appendixes to individual chapters are
called annexes to avoid confusion with appendixes to the book as a whole.
Multiple annexes and appendixes are enumerated with letters rather than
numbers to distinguish them from the chapters. For example, annex 3B is the
second annex in chapter 3; appendix C is the third appendix in the book.

3.4 Notes, reference lists, and bibliographies. Notes and source documentation
(reference lists or bibliographies) typically appear at the end of each chapter.
Notes precede references or bibliographies.

Reference lists differ from notes and bibliographies in that each entry must
correspond to a work cited in the text.
Bibliographies include additional entries that may be of interest to readers but
are not directly cited in the text. A book with references at the end of each
chapter may also have a bibliography as part of its back matter.

The bibliography may alternatively be titled “Additional Readings.”

3.5 Additional information. Refer to Chicago 1.5–35, 1.38–50, and 1.55–68.

3.6 Considerations for electronic publications. Editors helping to develop ­electronic


materials may refer to Chicago 1.117–125 for insights on incorporating
­navigation and hyperlinking and on adapting traditional front matter and
back matter.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 13


4. PERMISSIONS

4.1 Written permission. Authors are responsible for obtaining written permission
for the following:

• Use of a substantial amount of copyrighted material of any kind (for exam-


ple, text, figures, or tables)

• Use of any tables or figures containing pictorial elements (for example,


flowcharts, art, photographs, or maps)

• Use of any art, photographs, or maps.


See also Chicago 4.72–78. The manuscript editor should flag any portions
of the manuscript for which authors must seek reprint permission. Secure
written permission for the following non-Bank materials in the following cases:
• Use of a substantial amount of copyrighted material of any kind

• Use of any tables or figures containing pictorial elements (for example,


flowcharts, art, photographs, or maps)

• Use of any art, photographs, or maps.

Written permission is generally not required for the following elements:


The doctrine of fair use allows authors to quote from other authors’ work or to
reproduce small amounts of graphic material based on data, excluding pictorial
elements, for purposes of review or criticism or to illustrate or buttress their own
points. Authors who follow fair use should ensure that they accurately transcribe
any material, give credit to their sources, and do not quote out of context.

Additional information is provided in Chicago 4.84–94.

4.2 Source documentation. Full citations are required for all sources, regardless of
whether written permission is needed. Sources for figures and tables are
treated the same as sources for text. The information required is as follows:

• For text, provide either an author-date reference (preferred) or an endnote.


Refer to Chicago 14.2 for a discussion of the two systems, 15.5–9 for
author-date citations, and 14.19–28 for endnotes.

14 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


• For text boxes, provide either an author-date reference (preferred) or an
endnote. A source note is not required for original author-created content.

• For figures that are original and use text and not data—for example,
flowcharts—list “World Bank” as the source.

• For original (author-created) figures and tables using World Bank data,
provide a note specifying the source of the data (for example, “World
Development Indicators Database”); in the absence of this information,
provide a note specifying “World Bank data” as the source. Do not use
“Authors” or “Author’s compilation.” It is acceptable to start the source line
with “An elaboration of …” or “Based on …” or similar language.

• For figures and tables that use non–World Bank data, provide a source
note indicating the source of the data (refer to Chicago 3.77).

• For figures and tables that are copyrighted material used with permission,
use the following source note: “Source: [author-date citation], ©[copyright
owner]. Reproduced with permission from [copyright owner]; further permis-
sion required for reuse.” Alternatively, specific language provided by the
copyright holder may be used. For more information, refer to Chicago 4.92.

Whenever reference is being made to a particular passage within a source


publication, the page number should be provided in the author-date citation.
Complete source information must be provided in the reference list or
bibliography.

• For photographs, list the copyright holder in the source line. The source
line must follow one of two conventions:

• World Bank photographs: © Scott Wallace / World Bank. Further permission


required for reuse.

• Non–World Bank photographs: © Ami Vitale / Panos Pictures. Used with the
permission of Ami Vitale / Panos Pictures. Further permission required for
reuse.

4.3 Further reference. Refer to Chicago chapter 4 for more complete information
about rights and permissions and to Chicago chapters 14 and 15 for informa-
tion about documentation. Also refer to section 16 of this guide.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 15


5 . P U N C T U AT I O N

5.1 Punctuation and fonts. Refer to Chicago 6.2–6.

5.2 Punctuation and quotation marks. Refer to Chicago 6.9–11.

5.3 Punctuation relative to parentheses or brackets. Refer to Chicago 6.13, 6.18,


and 6.70.

ELLIPSES

5.4 Ellipses in quotations. Refer to Chicago 6.15 and 13.50–58. Chicago 13.53
retains the period at the end of a sentence before ellipses indicating the
omission of material.

5.5 Ellipses in elided operations and relations. Refer to Chicago 12.19–20. Ellipsis
dots are vertically centered unless the multiplication dot is present, in which
case they should be on the baseline.

COMMAS

5.6 Series and serial commas. Use a serial comma. Refer to Chicago 6.19–21.

5.7 Introductory words and phrases. Refer to Chicago 6.33.

5.8 “Not” and “not only” phrases. Refer to Chicago 6.45–46.

5.9 Dates. The preferred format is month-day-year (for example, December 10,
2019). Refer to Chicago 6.38. See also sections 9.15–18 of this guide.

5.10 Questions. Refer to Chicago 6.42.

5.11 Mathematical expressions. Refer to Chicago 12.18–19.

5.12 Parenthetical source citations. Refer to Chicago 15.23.

5.13 Adverbs too and either. In general, the adverbs too and either do not require a
comma; however, when too occurs in the middle of a sentence, a comma may
be added to clarify meaning.
16 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020
COLONS AND SEMICOLONS

5.14 Capitalization after a colon. Refer to Chicago 6.63.

5.15 Common misuses of colons. Refer to Chicago 6.67.

5.16 Parenthetical source citations. Refer to Chicago 15.23–24 and 15.30.

QUESTION MARKS

5.17 Questions within a sentence. Refer to Chicago 6.69 and 6.125. Chicago adds a
comma after titles that end in question marks (or exclamation points) if the
grammar of the sentence would normally use a comma (Chicago 6.126).

5.18 Indirect questions. Refer to Chicago 6.69–70.

HYPHENS AND DASHES

5.19 Automatic hyphenation. Automatic hyphenation should be turned off during


manuscript editing. Only hard hyphens (that is, hyphens in compound words)
should appear in the manuscript. Refer to Chicago 2.13 and 7.47.

5.20 Compound modifiers. Refer to Chicago 7.81–89, especially the tables on pages
446–57. Also see appendix F of this guide. Spare hyphenation is preferred.
Note that “decision-making” is hyphenated in all cases.

5.21 Items of equal weight. Use a hyphen to link items of equal weight (for example,
mother-daughter dinner). Do not use an en dash.

5.22 Em dash. Refer to Chicago 6.85–90. Sentences should not contain more than
one pair of em dashes, and consecutive sentences containing pairs of dashes
should be avoided if possible. Use the Word character to create em dashes.

5.23 En dash. Refer to Chicago 6.78–84. Use the Word character to create en
dashes. Use hyphens, not en dashes, to link items of equal weight.

5.24 Minus signs. Do not use a hyphen or an en dash. Either use a minus sign
character, which can be found in Symbols or in Character Map on Windows
(look in Programs, Accessories, System Tools), or instruct the typesetter to set
a minus sign (for example, <<minus>>1.25). Refer to Chicago 6.84.

PARENTHESES AND BRACKETS

5.25 Translations of terms. Refer to Chicago 6.96.

5.26 Parentheses within parentheses. Use square brackets within parentheses.


Refer to Chicago 6.97 and 6.101.

5.27 Quoted material. Parentheses surround an insertion made by the original


writer. Square brackets surround an insertion made by someone other than the
original writer. Refer to Chicago 6.99 and 13.60. See also Chicago 13.64–72.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 17


5.28 Mathematical expressions. Refer to Chicago chapter 12, especially 12.26–35.

5.29 Parenthetical source citations. Refer to Chicago 15.21 and 15.24. Chicago
15.25 states that the date should immediately follow the author’s name, even
in possessive citations, for example, “as Tufte’s (2011) excellent book….” In the
source line of figures, maps, and tables, parentheses are unnecessary around
the date in an author-date reference.

Examples

Source: De la Fuente 2015.


Sources: De la Fuente 2014; World Bank 2015.

SLASHES

5.30 Alternatives. Avoid using a slash to represent “and” or “or.” Instead, use the
word “and” or “or.” For example, use “he or she” rather than “he/she.” Also,
avoid using “and/or” unless rephrasing would make the sentence awkward.

5.31 Years. Use a slash to indicate the last part of one year and the first part of the
next (for example, 2003/04). The total time period indicated should not exceed
one year. A fiscal year is a common example. Refer to Chicago 6.107, and use
“2001/02” rather than “2001/2.”

5.32 Signifying “per.” In text, avoid using a slash to represent “per.” For example,
use “R$500 per month” or “R$500 a month” rather than “R$500/month.” How-
ever, it is acceptable to use a slash in figures and tables to represent “per.”

LISTS

5.33 Run-in lists. Either numerals or letters may be used, but be consistent. Do not
use Roman numerals. Refer to Chicago 6.129.

5.34 Vertical lists. Refer to Chicago 6.130–32. For bulleted lists, see the examples
that follow.

5.35 Use a numbered list only when a sequence is being shown. Start each bulleted
entry with a capital letter.

Examples
Example of a bulleted list with incomplete sentences:

A range of direct and indirect measures is aimed at protecting the domestic


pharmaceutical industry, including the following:
• Direct subsidies, loans, or tax breaks for modernization investments
• Import restrictions or import duties for competitor products
• Preferential treatment in public procurement
• Preference in regulatory approvals
• Preferential treatment in pricing decisions
• Reluctance to enforce strict quality standards
• Subsidies for mergers of foreign investors into domestic companies.

18 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


Example of a bulleted list with complete sentences:

Following are important questions to ask:


• Which segment of the market needs to be analyzed (drugs in the
public sector, reimbursed drugs, drugs for chronic conditions)?
• Whose costs are to be analyzed (costs to the end consumer, to a
public payer, to both)?
• Which elements of the price should be assessed (ex-factory price;
import, wholesale, and distribution margins; retail margins; taxes and
regulatory costs)?

Example of a bulleted list with introductory phrases followed by complete


sentences:

The success of Lotus’s project in reducing stigma and discrimination


toward and among MSM and transgender persons comes from the
confluence of several key factors:

• Staff commitment. Lotus staff and cultural team members exhibited


extraordinary determination, courage, and dedication in addressing
sensitive issues in the public forum of theater. The power of the collec-
tive voice and the safety net of a close-knit group to support and care
for the members have proved critical to the success of this process.

• Theater as a medium for change. Theater creates a unique space to


address sensitive and taboo topics that could not otherwise be
discussed publicly in a mixed forum of women and men and across
generations. Furthermore, in putting these issues out in the open,
plays create a new space for discussion and action.

• Carefully targeted messaging. Skillful communication, careful crafting


of messages, and clever use of street theater were all keys to the
project’s success. The play was simultaneously entertaining and
educational. It held the audience’s attention and appealed to people’s
emotions and better instincts.

Less frequently used is the bulleted list punctuated as a continuous sentence.


When doing so, start each bullet with a capital letter. See Chicago 6.131.

Example of a bulleted list punctuated as a continuous sentence:

The Community Innovation Survey provides a very rich data set. Examples
of indicators that can be constructed include the share of firms that are

• Introducing a good or service new to the firm, new to the market, or


new to the world;
• Applying for a patent;
• Reporting important impacts of innovation (improved products,
increased range of products, or expanded markets); and
• Reporting effects of organizational innovation (improved products, reduced
response time, reduced costs, or improved employee satisfaction).

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 19


6. URLs, DOIs, AND EMAIL ADDRESSES

6.1 Punctuation. Refer to Chicago 6.8 and 14.17.

6.2 Line breaks. Refer to Chicago 6.8, 6.77, 7.46, and 14.18. If it is necessary to
break a uniform resource locator (URL) or digital object identifier (DOI) at
the end of a line in a print publication, follow Chicago 14.18.

In manuscripts, do not insert a hard return to break a URL. Refer to


Chicago 2.13.

6.3 Access dates. Some authors will provide the dates of access; most will not.
Accessed dates should be kept when provided but not queried when they are
not provided. The inconsistency is acceptable in this instance. When they are
provided, they should immediately precede the URL or database and be
separated from the surrounding citation by commas (for example, “, accessed
December 1, 2019”). If no date of publication or revision can be determined
from the source, then the access date should be provided; see Chicago 4.12
and 14.13.

6.4 Full address. Always include the protocol (for example, http:// or https://) in
URLs. Refer to Chicago 14.17.

6.5 DOI and URLs in source information. Chicago recommends the addition of a
DOI or URL in the source information of an electronic publication. Refer to
Chicago 14.6.

As unique and permanent identifiers of material, DOIs are preferred to URLs


in source information when available. Refer to Chicago 14.8.

In the text, “DOI” is uppercased; in source lines and in references, it is


lowercased and followed immediately by a colon without a space. Refer
to Chicago 15.9.

20 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


7 . W O R D T R E AT M E N T

7.1 Further reference. For additional information, refer to Chicago chapters 7 and 8.
See also appendixes F and G of this guide.

NAMES

The World Bank Group

7.2 The World Bank and the World Bank Group.

The organizations that constitute the World Bank are as follows:


International Bank for Reconstruction and Development (IBRD)
International Development Association (IDA)

The organizations that constitute the World Bank Group are as follows:
International Bank for Reconstruction and Development (IBRD)
International Development Association (IDA)
International Centre for Settlement of Investment Disputes (ICSID)
International Finance Corporation (IFC)
Multilateral Investment Guarantee Agency (MIGA)

These organizations may be referred to as institutions but not as agencies.

Do not use “the” preceding IFC and MIGA.

Unless the context specifically distinguishes between these entities, use simply
the World Bank.

7.3 Global Practices and Cross-Cutting Solutions Areas.

The 15 Global Practices (GPs) and 5 Cross-Cutting Solutions Areas (CCSAs)


coordinate with the regional vice presidencies and country management teams
to connect global and local expertise to better serve our clients.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 21


Global Practices
Agriculture
Digital Development
Education
Energy
Environment and Natural Resources
Finance, Competitiveness, and Innovation
Governance
Health, Nutrition, and Population
Jobs and Development
Macroeconomics, Trade, and Investment
Poverty
Social Protection
Social, Urban, Rural, and Resilience
Transport
Water

CCSAs
Climate Change
Fragility, Conflict, and Violence
Gender
Jobs
Public-Private Partnerships (PPPs)

Following first mention, each Global Practice or CCSA may be referred to as the
Group.

7.4 Regions.

The World Bank’s regional vice presidencies, referred to as Regions, are as


follows. The abbreviations have been provided for reference, but their use
should be avoided.

Regional vice presidencies


Africa or Sub-Saharan Africa (AFR or SSA)
East Asia and Pacific (EAP)
Europe and Central Asia (ECA)
Latin America and the Caribbean (LAC)
Middle East and North Africa (MNA or MENA)
South Asia (SAR)

IFC’s Regions are as follows:


East Asia and Pacific (EAP)
Europe and Central Asia (ECA)
Latin America and the Caribbean (LAC)
Middle East and North Africa (MENA)
IFC’s MENA includes Afghanistan and Pakistan
South Asia (SA)
Sub-Saharan Africa (SSA)

7.5 Capitalization of unit names. The terms vice presidency or vice presidential
unit, department, and unit should always be capitalized when they follow the
full name of the unit. When used alone, they should be lowercased.

22 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


Examples: Capitalization of unit names

The Strategy and Operations unit is part of the Development Economics


Vice Presidency.
The vice presidency plays an active role in all the World Bank’s activities.

So that it is not confused with a geographic region, the term Region should
always be capitalized when it refers to an organizational unit within the World
Bank. It is often necessary to query the author to determine whether capitaliza-
tion is needed.

Examples: Organizational unit

The World Bank’s Europe and Central Asia Region is focusing activities
on a number of global priorities.

The Region has designated a first set of eight countries to be the focus of
an initial set of actions to be taken to meet the MDGs.

Examples: Geographic region

The economic downturn in the Middle East and North Africa region
deepened in calendar year 2015. Economic growth for the region fell from
3.2 percent to 3.1 percent.

7.6 Initiatives, loans, programs, projects, and strategies. The names of general
types of initiatives, loans, programs, projects, and strategies should be lower-
cased. The names of specific initiatives, loans, programs, projects, and strate-
gies should be capitalized. Do not use italics or boldface. The terms initiative,
loan, program, project, and strategy should be capitalized when they follow a
title but should be lowercased when used alone.

Examples

The World Bank’s lending program in Afghanistan was revived in fiscal 2015
by the approval of Afghanistan’s Emergency Transport Rehabilitation Project.

In Mongolia, a legal reform project is supporting the establishment of an


administrative court system.

The World Bank supports the Education for All Fast-Track Initiative. The
initiative has raised the profile of education, strengthened government
commitment, and focused on outcomes.

Refer to appendix F of this guide. Also refer to the World Bank’s projects
database, http://www.worldbank.org/projects, and the International Monetary
Fund’s (IMF) terminology glossary, http://www.imf.org/external/np/term/eng/.

7.7 Other institutional names. Refer to appendix F of this guide.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 23


Organizations Other Than the World Bank

7.8 Spelling. The names of other organizations should be spelled as each organiza-
tion would spell it.

Example

Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development should not be


changed to Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development.

7.9 Names in foreign languages. Names of organizations in foreign languages


should be set in roman type and capitalized according to the conventions of
the country concerned. If the organization’s name is widely known in the
original language, a translation is not necessary. However, if a translation would
be meaningful and is available, it should be provided in parentheses (along
with the organizational abbreviation, when applicable).

Example

Ministerio de Educación y Cultura (Ministry of Education and Culture; MEC)

Alternatively, the English translation may be used followed by the foreign-


language name in parentheses. The order chosen should be applied consis-
tently throughout the manuscript.

After a name has been introduced, the abbreviation should be used in subse-
quent instances. If there is no abbreviation, either the English translation or the
foreign-language name may be used, but the choice should be applied
consistently.

Original and transliterated organizational names are not italicized (Chicago


11.14).

7.10 Initiatives, loans, programs, projects, and strategies. Refer to section 7.6 of this
guide.

Personal Names

7.11 Professional titles. Professional titles within the text of the book should be
treated consistently with Chicago 8.19–33. Within the acknowledgments
section, titles may be treated according to either Chicago 8.19 or 8.20,
depending on the client’s preference.

Place Names

7.12 Regional names. Be careful not to confuse geographic regions with the World
Bank’s regional vice presidential units listed in section 7.4. Often the geo-
graphic region being discussed has the same name as a World Bank vice
presidential unit, but not always.

Any defined subset of countries (for example, Southeast Asia, Central Europe,
North Africa) should be capitalized. Terms that indicate a general, undefined
location should be lowercased.

24 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


Examples

Gross domestic product in Latin America and the Caribbean contracted by


0.8 percent in 2015.

In Latin America, the failure of significant currency depreciations to spark


inflation is striking.

The economies of Eastern Europe and Central Asia turned in solid growth
performances during 2015.

Considering the weakness in Western Europe, the transition group weath-


ered the slowdown fairly well.

The term region should always be lowercased when it refers to a geographic


region. World Bank vice presidential unit abbreviations should not be used to
represent geographic regions. If space is tight in figures and tables, the
shortened versions indicated below may be used. However, it is preferable to
use the full version if at all possible.
Africa
E. Asia & Pacific
E. Eur. & Cent. Asia
L. Amer. & the Caribbean
Mid. East & N. Africa
S. Asia
Refer to Chicago 8.47 for information about regions.

7.13 Country and economy names. Country and economy names must be
­consistent with the list of country and economy names provided by the World
Bank’s Corporate Secretariat. Refer to appendix C of this guide for a complete
list. Consult the production editor if a name does not appear on the list. In lists
of countries and economies (vertical or horizontal), list the names in
­alphabetical order unless a specific order is warranted by the context.
When the shortening of a name is allowed, the full name should be used on
first mention either in the book or in each chapter, depending on the produc-
tion editor’s instructions. The shortened version may be used thereafter. The
abbreviation Rep. should be used only in tables and figures, never in text.

7.14 Other place names. Refer to Chicago 8.44–59.

Brand Names

7.15 Brand names and trademarks. Refer to Chicago 8.153–54. Trademark symbols
should be omitted from running text.

Titles of Works

ENGLISH-LANGUAGE PRINT PUBLICATIONS

7.16 Capitalization. Use headline-style capitalization. Capitalize all nouns, pronouns,


verbs, adjectives, and adverbs. Lowercase most prepositions. Refer to Chicago
8.159–61.

7.17 Titles of formally published freestanding publications. Titles of formally published


freestanding publications, such as books and journals, are italicized. Refer to

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 25


Chicago 8.163. Italicize only the official name of a periodical. Added descriptive
terms are lowercased and set in roman type. Refer to Chicago 8.171–73. Do not
use the title of a work to stand for the subject of a work. Refer to Chicago 8.174.

7.18 Subtitles. In running text or in a bibliography, a colon separates the title from
the subtitle. The subtitle receives the same treatment as the title; that is, if the
title is italicized, then the subtitle is also italicized. Refer to Chicago 8.164.

If there are two subtitles, a semicolon separates the first subtitle from the
second subtitle. Refer to Chicago 14.90.

7.19 Titles of individual selections within freestanding publications. Titles of articles,


feature stories, chapters, essays, and the like are set in roman and enclosed in
quotation marks. Refer to Chicago 8.163 and 8.177.

7.20 Changes to titles. Generally, original spelling, hyphenation, and punctuation


should be preserved. Refer to Chicago 8.165. However, certain changes to
punctuation and capitalization are permissible. Refer to Chicago 8.165–66.

7.21 Shortened titles. Refer to Chicago 8.168–69 and 14.29–31.

7.22 Periodicals. In the text, “the” is lowercased and set in roman type even if it is
part of the official title. Refer to Chicago 8.170.

For US and Canadian newspaper titles, a city name may be added and
italicized along with the official title, with the state or province provided in
parentheses if needed. A city name is not added for well-known national
newspapers. Refer to Chicago 14.193; see Chicago 14.193–194 for treatment
of names outside of the United States and Canada.

7.23 Unpublished or informally published works. Titles of unpublished or informally


published works use headline-style capitalization, are set in roman type, and
are enclosed in quotation marks. The title of a forthcoming book may be
italicized, but in running text, place forthcoming in parentheses following the
title. In the reference list, place forthcoming where the date would normally
appear. In text citations, forthcoming is preceded by a comma. Refer to
Chicago 8.188, 14.146, and 15.45.
Examples

Smith’s book, The New Economy (forthcoming), discusses this topic.


Smith, John. Forthcoming. The New Economy. Washington, DC: World Bank.
For more information, consult Smith (forthcoming).
(Smith, forthcoming).

7.24 Public documents. Generally, public documents use headline-style capitaliza-


tion and are italicized. For legal documents, Chicago has adopted The
Bluebook: A Uniform System of Citation, with the ALWD Citation Manual:
A Professional System of Citation as an alternative. Refer to Chicago
14.269–305 and 15.58–59.

ENGLISH-LANGUAGE ELECTRONIC PUBLICATIONS

7.25 Electronic publications analogous to print publications. Regardless of whether


they have been printed, periodicals or complete works use headline-style
capitalization and are italicized; articles or sections of works use headline-style

26 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


capitalization, are set in roman type, and are enclosed in quotation marks.
Refer to Chicago 8.191.

7.26 Databases. Database titles use headline-style capitalization and are set in
roman type without quotation marks. Refer to Chicago 14.257.

7.27 Websites, web pages, and blogs. Titles of websites use headline-style capital-
ization and are set in roman type without quotation marks. Titles of web pages
within a site use headline-style capitalization, are set in roman type, and are
enclosed in quotation marks. See Chicago 8.191 and 14.205–207.
Blogs are treated like journals: their titles are italicized, and blog entries, like
journal articles, are enclosed in quotation marks. Refer to Chicago 8.192,
14.205–206, and 14.208.

FOREIGN-LANGUAGE PUBLICATIONS

7.28 Capitalization of foreign-language titles. Use sentence-style capitalization. Refer


to Chicago 11.6. However, exceptions are made according to the conventions
of the foreign language. For example, German capitalizes common nouns in
both running text and titles. See Chicago 11.39 and 14.193.

7.29 Punctuation. A period or semicolon between title and subtitle may be changed
to a colon, and guillemets may be changed to quotation marks. No other punc-
tuation changes should be made. Refer to Chicago 11.7.

7.30 Italic versus roman type. Titles that use the Latin alphabet (including transliter-
ated titles) are set in italic or roman type in accordance with the principles for
English-language publications. Refer to Chicago 11.8.

7.31 Foreign-language titles with English translations. When an English translation


follows a foreign-language title, it is placed in parentheses. If the translation has
been published, the title uses headline-style capitalization and is italicized. If
the translation has not been published, the title uses sentence-style capitaliza-
tion and is not italicized. Refer to Chicago 11.9.
In reference lists, English translations are enclosed in brackets rather than
parentheses. Refer to Chicago 14.99.

7.32 Periodicals. In foreign-language titles, an initial article is capitalized and treated


like the rest of the title if it is part of the official title. Refer to Chicago 8.170.
If the city name of a foreign newspaper is not part of the official title, it is added
in parentheses after the title. It is not italicized. Refer to Chicago 14.194.

TERMS

7.33 World Bank terms. Refer to appendix F of this guide. Note that the World Bank
allows the term “developing countries” but prefers the more precise terms that
are based on the following income classifications: “low-income country (LIC),”
“lower-middle-income country (LMIC),” “upper-middle-income country
(UMIC),” and “high-income country (HIC).” The World Bank updates the list of
countries and economies in each of these categories annually on July 1. For the
2020 fiscal year, low-income economies are defined as those with a GNI per
capita, calculated using the World Bank Atlas method, of $1,025 or less in
2018; lower-middle-income economies are those with a GNI per capita

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 27


between $1,026 and $3,995; upper-middle-income economies are those with a
GNI per capita between $3,996 and $12,375; and high-income economies are
those with a GNI per capita of $12,376 or more.

7.34 Computer-related terms. Following is a list of commonly used computer-related


terms:

email, internet, intranet, listserver, online, web page, website.

7.35 URLs and DOIs. The protocol (for example, http, https, or ftp) should
be included at the start of a URL, followed by a colon and double slash.
The lowercase letters doi, followed by a colon, precede a DOI. Refer to
Chicago 14.6–8 and section 6.5 of this guide for more information.

7.36 Medical terms. Refer to Chicago 8.143–146.

7.37 Compounds. Follow traditional rules for capitalizing hyphenated terms.


Refer to Chicago 8.161. Chicago capitalizes the second word in a
hyphenated number, for example, “Twenty-One.”

Common World Bank compounds are included in appendix F of this guide.


Refer to the dictionary and Chicago 5.92–93, 6.76, 6.80, and 7.81–89 for
complete information about compounds and hyphenation. Chicago 7.89
includes a table of compounds.

7.38 Terms in foreign languages. Refer to Chicago 7.53 and 11.3–6. For more
details, see Chicago chapter 11 generally.

7.39 Translations of foreign-language terms. Refer to Chicago 7.53.

7.40 Transliterations. Refer to Chicago 11.71.

WORD DIVISION

7.41 Primary reference. The primary reference for word division is Merriam-Webster’s
Collegiate Dictionary, 11th edition.

7.42 Proper nouns and personal names. Refer to Chicago 7.42.

7.43 Numerals. Refer to Chicago 7.43.

7.44 Numerals with abbreviated units of measure. Refer to Chicago 7.44.

7.45 Run-in lists. Refer to Chicago 7.45.

7.46 URLs and email addresses. Refer to Chicago 7.46 and 14.12–18 for revised
rules for line breaks. See also Chicago 6.8 and 6.77.

7.47 Mathematical expressions. Refer to Chicago 12.23.

7.48 Hyphenation and appearance. Avoid an abundance of hyphenated lines on


one page. Allow no more than three hyphenated lines in succession. Refer to
Chicago 7.47.

7.49 Automatic hyphenation. Turn off automatic hyphenation during manuscript


editing. Only hard hyphens (that is, hyphens in compound words) should
appear in the manuscript. Refer to Chicago 2.13 and 7.47.

28 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


8 . A B B R E V I AT I O N S

8.1 Further reference. For additional information, refer to Chicago chapter 10,
especially 10.2. For abbreviations that commonly appear in World Bank
publications, see appendix E of this guide.

8.2 When to use abbreviations. Spell out all abbreviations at the first occurrence in
each chapter, followed by the abbreviation in parentheses. In instances in which
the abbreviation has become so widely known and used that the full term has
essentially ceased to be used, the abbreviation does not need to be written
out. Indicate such abbreviations on the style sheet for the project. For the
reader’s sake, eliminate clusters of abbreviations and do not use abbreviations
unnecessarily. In boxes, spell out all abbreviations at the first occurrence, even
if previously abbreviated in the chapter text.

8.3 World Bank regional vice presidencies. The abbreviations listed below fre-
quently appear in World Bank manuscripts. To the extent possible, avoid using
these abbreviations.

AFR or SSA Africa or Sub-Saharan Africa


EAP East Asia and Pacific
ECA Europe and Central Asia
LAC Latin America and the Caribbean
MNA or MENA Middle East and North Africa
SAR South Asia

These abbreviations should not be used to represent geographic regions.

8.4 Geographic regions. Refer to section 7.12 of this guide.

8.5 Country and economy names. Refer to appendix C of this guide. For the
United States and the United Kingdom, the abbreviations “US” and “UK” are
permissible when used as nouns or adjectives in running text. When used as
nouns, “United Kingdom” and “United States” are preferred, but the abbrevia-
tions are permitted. The names should be written out in tables and figures
unless space is a problem.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 29


8.6 US states. Use US Postal Service abbreviations. However, state names should
always be written out in running text. Refer to Chicago 10.27.

8.7 “The” preceding an abbreviation. Acronyms (which are read as words) usually
are not preceded by the; initialisms, which are not pronounced as words,
generally are preceded by the. Refer to Chicago 10.9.

8.8 Capitals versus lowercase. Refer to Chicago 10.6 and 10.26. Chicago prefers
the use of capitals in abbreviations, including acronyms (for example, DANIDA,
not Danida).

8.9 The following types of entities should be treated consistently: EU-10 and G-20,
not EU10, EU 10, G 20, or G20.

8.10 Headings. Refer to section 11.5.

8.11 Titles in figures and tables. Refer to sections 13.5 and 14.6.

8.12 Keys/legends and line labels. Refer to section 13.18.

30 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


9. NUMBERS AND MEASUREMENTS

9.1 Numerals versus words. Use numerals for the following:

• Double-digit whole numbers (10 and above), both cardinals and ordinals;
refer to Chicago 9.3

• Numbers that are part of a larger number (in the millions or more; for
example, 4 million)

• Physical quantities (for example, 6 kilometers; 8 ounces); also see sections


9.7 and 9.8 of this guide

• Percentages (for example, 8 percent) and decimal fractions (for example,


0.89); refer to Chicago 9.18–19; also see sections 9.9–10 of this guide

• During the editing process, query for consistency if an author uses different
numerical terms in the same sentence, for example, “8 percent and
one-fourth”; also, use, for example, “one-fourth” or “one-quarter” rather
than “a fourth” or “a quarter”

• Ratios (for example, a male-female ratio of 6 to 10); also see section 9.11 of
this guide

• Statistical expressions (for example, 6 deaths per 1,000 live births)

• Monetary amounts when accompanied by a currency symbol (for example,


US$1 a day); see also sections 9.12–14 and appendix D of this guide

• Decades (for example, the 1990s); the year alone (for example, 2013); and
the day of the month (for example, May 5, 2015); refer to Chicago 9.29,
9.31, 9.33, and 9.35; also see sections 9.15–18 of this guide

• Parts of a book (for example, chapter 3); refer to Chicago 9.26; see Chicago
9.27–28 for periodicals and legal instruments

9.2 Numbers at the beginning of a sentence. Refer to Chicago 9.5.

9.3 Consistency and flexibility. Refer to Chicago 9.7.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 31


PUNCTUATION AND INCLUSIVE NUMBERS

9.4 Commas. Use commas in numbers greater than 999 (for example, “1,525”).
Refer to Chicago 9.54.

9.5 En dashes. Refer to Chicago 9.60–61.

9.6 Abbreviating inclusive numbers. Refer to Chicago 9.61 and 9.63. For years,
however, see sections 9.15–18 of this guide.

PHYSICAL QUANTITIES

9.7 Abbreviations. Abbreviate units (for example, “km” for kilometers) in tables and
figures. Write them out in running text unless their frequency creates awkward-
ness, in which case use abbreviations.

9.8 Simple fractions. Refer to Chicago 9.14–15.

PERCENTAGES, DECIMAL FRACTIONS, AND RATIOS

9.9 Percentages. Write out percent in running text. The symbol may be used in
figures and tables (refer to sections 13 and 14 of this guide for more informa-
tion about figures and tables, respectively). Note that percent and percentage
are not interchangeable. Refer to appendix F of this guide.

9.10 Decimal fractions. Numbers that are to be compared should have the same
number of decimal places. If they do not, query the author. Numbers less than
one should be preceded by a zero (for example, 0.25) unless they are probabili-
ties or correlation coefficients. Refer to Chicago 9.19.

9.11 Ratios. Make sure the verbal and numerical expressions of a ratio are parallel
in construction (for example, a teacher-student ratio of 1 to 30, not a teacher-
student ratio of 30 to 1).

MONEY

9.12 Billions. The British billion is different from the American billion. Unless the
manuscript uses only US dollars, insert a note at the first mention (a billion is
1,000 million) and query the author to verify that this is what is meant. Refer to
Chicago 5.250 (under billion; trillion on page 315) and 9.8.

9.13 US dollars and currency symbols. If the manuscript mostly uses US dollars,
insert the following note at the foot of the list of abbreviations (or wherever the
production editor specifies): All dollar amounts are US dollars unless otherwise
indicated. In figures and tables, use a comma to separate the unit from the
currency, for example, “US$, millions” or “US$, billions.”

32 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


If a variety of currencies is used in the manuscript, the appropriate currency
symbol should always precede the number. See section 9.14 and appendix D
of this guide. See also Chicago 9.21–25.

9.14 Other currencies.


If the manuscript mostly uses one type of currency, insert the following note at
the foot of the list of abbreviations (or wherever the production editor speci-
fies): All monetary amounts are [currency type] unless otherwise indicated.
Brackets indicate text to be supplied.
When currency unit abbreviations are used with monetary amounts, leave a
space between the abbreviation and the amount.

Examples

Afghani Af 0.01
Swiss franc Sw F 4,000
Indian rupee Rs 10 billion

When currency symbols are used, no space is used between the symbol and
the amount.

Examples

Japanese yen ¥0.01


Nigerian naira N100
Paraguayan guaraní G1 million

When the currency unit is used alone, it should be written out in full and
preceded by the country name. The country name need not be repeated after
the first instance if it is clear from the context (for example, in a book dealing
with only one country).

Examples

Bangladesh taka
Costa Rican colones

Refer to appendix D of this guide for a list of currency units.

DATES

9.15 Specific dates. The preferred format is month-day-year (for example,


December 10, 2015).

9.16 Specific decades. Use four-digit years (for example, the 1990s rather than
the nineties or the ’90s).

9.17 Ranges of years. Use an en dash and two digits for the second year in a range
of years. Refer to Chicago 9.64. Inclusive numbers are abbreviated according

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 33


to Chicago 9.61, but these rules are modified slightly for years, as the following
examples demonstrate.

Examples
1998–99
1995–2005
2001–03
2008–12
2014–16

9.18 Fiscal years. Use a slash to indicate the last part of one year and the first part
of the next (for example, 2009/10, 2012/13). The total time frame must not
exceed 12 months.

In text, use fiscal (for example, fiscal 2010). In tables and figures, FY can
be used (for example, FY2015 or FY15), but choose a consistent style.

9.19 Centuries. Spell out and lowercase specific centuries, for example, the “eighth
century” or the “twenty-first century.” See Chicago 7.89, 3.

9.20 Ages
Use hyphens in both the noun and adjective terms of age designations
(­Chicago 7.89).

Examples

a three-year-old child

a group of ten- and eleven-year olds

Use age or ages rather than aged.

Examples

ages seven years and above

age nine years

Join inclusive spelled-out age ranges with to rather than an en dash


(­Chicago 9.60).

Spell out age in instances of under-five mortality rate (U5MR)

34 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


10. Q U O TAT I O N S

10.1 Credit and permissions. Refer to Chicago chapter 4 and 13.3 and section 4 of
this guide.

10.2 Source citations. Refer to Chicago 13.64–70.

10.3 Permissible changes. Refer to Chicago 13.7–8.

TREATMENT

10.4 Run in or set off. Refer to Chicago 13.10.

10.5 Initial capital or lowercase letter. It is permissible to change the initial letter to
capital or lowercase. Refer to Chicago 13.7 and 13.19–20.

10.6 Paragraphing. Set the opening line of a block quotation flush left. Indent the
first line of subsequent paragraphs in the quotation. Refer to Chicago
13.22–24.

10.7 Foreign-language quotations. Refer to Chicago 11.11–17.

PUNCTUATION

10.8 Quotation marks. Refer to Chicago 13.30–38. Double quotation marks are
used first, then single. Refer also to Chicago 6.11.

10.9 Punctuation with quotation marks. Refer to Chicago 6.9 and 6.10.

10.10 Ellipses. Refer to Chicago 13.50–56.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 35


10.11 Parentheses and brackets. Parentheses surround an insertion made by the
original writer. Square brackets surround an insertion made by someone other
than the original writer. Refer to Chicago 6.99 and 13.60. See also Chicago
13.64–70.

10.12 Introductory phrases. Refer to Chicago 13.14–17.

10.13 Missing material. Refer to Chicago 13.59–60.

36 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


11. T E X T H E A D I N G S

11.1 Heading levels. Preferably, no more than four heading levels should be used,
including chapter titles. The manuscript editor should code the heading levels
using the Microsoft Word Formatting Instructions in appendix A.3 in this
guide or, at the discretion of the production editor, may insert bold and angle
brackets. For example, insert <<A>> next to an A-level heading.

11.2 Stacked heads. Stacked heads should be avoided whenever possible.


If authors do not provide text to separate heads, then stacked heads are
permissible. No queries for authors to provide new text are needed.

11.3 Numbering. In general, headings should not be numbered. However, number-


ing may make sense for some publications, such as handbooks. The produc-
tion editor will provide direction.

11.4 Content. Headings should be brief and parallel in structure and tone. Repeti-
tion of words and phrases should be avoided. For example, in a book titled
Health Care in India, the chapter title “History of Health Care in India”
followed by the headings “The Indian Health Care System” and “Develop-
ment of the Health Care System” might not be preferable.

Headings should be self-contained. Ellipses or dashes should not be used to


connect one heading to the next.

11.5 Abbreviations. Previously defined abbreviations may be used in headings.


However, abbreviations should not be introduced in headings.

11.6 Format. Headline-style capitalization is usually, but not always, used. The series
template can be used or, for a standalone product, the production editor’s
instructions. Chicago 8.159 provides guidance on headline-style capitalization.

For hyphenated terms, follow Chicago 8.161. Note that Chicago capitalizes
both elements for hyphenated spelled-out numbers in titles, for example,
Twenty-First.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 37


12. T E X T B O X E S

12.1 Text references. All text boxes should be referenced individually by number
within the text.

12.2 Length. Text boxes should be no more than 700 words in length.
The ­manuscript editor should assess the likelihood of a text box running
too long. When it appears that a text box will be too long, the manuscript
editor should insert an author query requesting that the text be shortened.

12.3 Numbering. Boxes are numbered separately from figures and tables. Double
numeration is typically used, for example, box 1.1. The following are special
treatments:

• Overview boxes: Boxes in an overview use the two-digit convention with


the letter “O” (for example, box O.1 is the first box in an overview).

• Annex boxes: Boxes in a chapter annex have the annex letter inserted after
the chapter number (for example, box 3A.1 is the first box in the first annex
to chapter 3).

• Appendix boxes: Boxes in an appendix use the appendix letter in place of


the chapter number (for example, box B.3 is the third box in appendix B).

12.4 Titles. Titles should be descriptive, should be parallel in structure, and should
use headline-style capitalization, unless the series template specifies otherwise.
Refer to Chicago 8.159–161 for information about headline-style capitalization.
12.5 Graphics. Every figure, map, or table within a box should have a number and
a text title. In a text box, number any figures and tables according to the
following example: Figure B2.1.1, in which “B” indicates that the figure is in a
box, “2.1” identifies the box number (it is the first box in chapter 2), and “.1”
indicates that this figure is the first in box 2.1.

If a figure in a box comprises multiple panels, and these panels are referenced
in the text, they should be referred to as “panel a,” “panel b,” and so forth.
Each panel within the figure should be given a subtitle that includes a letter
(for example, “a,” “b”), followed by a descriptive heading.

38 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


Figures in a box in an annex should be numbered according to the following
example: Figure B2A.1.1, in which “B” indicates that the figure is in a box,
“2A.1” identifies the box number (it is the first box in annex 2A, the first annex
of chapter 2), and “.1” indicates that this figure is the first in box 2A.1.

12.6 Notes. Notes within text boxes must be completely self-contained to avoid
confusion with notes in the text. Superscript lowercase letters, not numbers, are
used within the text of the box. The notes section should be placed at the end
of the box and should use full-size lowercase letters, not superscript, followed
by a period.

12.7 Sources. The author-date method of citing sources is preferred. Complete


bibliographic information should be provided in the reference list for the
chapter or book as a whole; it does not need to be included in the text box.

12.8 Placement. Boxes requiring two pages are preferably set on facing pages
(a verso-recto spread). The placement of figures and tables takes priority over
that of boxes.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 39


13. F I G U R E S A N D M A P S

13.1 Further reference. For additional information, refer to Chicago chapter 3. Also,
see the figure editing checklist provided in section 13.27 and the edited
samples provided in section 13.28 of this guide.

13.2 Text references. All figures and maps should be referenced individually within
the text. Either of the following forms is acceptable:

• “Vertical trade in low- and middle-income countries increased from


8 percent in 2005 to around 33 percent in 2015 (figure 2.1).”
• “As figure 2.1 shows, vertical trade in low- and middle-income countries
increased from 8 percent in 2005 to around 33 percent in 2015.”

13.3 Numbering. Every figure and map should have a number. Figures are num-
bered separately from boxes and tables unless they appear within a box.
Double numeration is typically used (for example, figure 1.1), and the number
is placed above the figure in all cases. The following are special treatments:

• Box figures: Assign a number and title to every figure within a box. In the
text box, number any figures according to the following example for the
first figure in box 2.1: Figure B2.1.1.

• Overview figures: Figures in an overview use the two-digit convention with


the letter “O” (for example, figure O.1 is the first figure in an overview).

• Annex figures: Figures in a chapter annex have the annex letter inserted
after the chapter number (for example, figure 3A.1 is the first figure in the
first annex to chapter 3).
• Appendix figures: Figures in an appendix use the appendix letter in place
of the chapter number (for example, figure B.3 is the third figure in
appendix B).

40 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


TITLES

13.4 Placement and format. Every figure should have a title. Figures may be viewed
electronically apart from their respective chapters and should be electronically
searchable. The title should appear in both the Word file of the manuscript
and any corresponding data file, such as Excel or Stata.

Figure titles are placed above the figure, following the figure number. They
should use headline-style capitalization (refer to Chicago 8.159–161) unless
the series template specifies otherwise.

13.5 Content. Titles should be descriptive, covering “What,” “Where,” and


“When.” They should not include background information or describe results
illustrated by the figure. Ellipses or dashes should not be used to connect one
figure title to the next.

Geographic areas and dates, if relevant, should be placed at the end of the
title. Use judgment in determining whether this information is needed. For
example, the country name likely is not needed in a book that focuses entirely
on one country.

Abbreviations within the title are acceptable, but avoid using the World Bank’s
regional abbreviations (AFR or SSA, EAP, ECA, LAC, MNA or MENA, and SAR).

13.6 Subparts. When a figure contains multiple charts, each chart should have a
subpart title and corresponding letter, for example, “a. Infant mortality rates,
2015.” In the text, these charts are referred to as panels: “see figure 3.4, panel
a,” or “panel b of figure 2.3.”

UNIT INDICATORS

13.7 Title each axis and provide unit indicators in the axis title; see 13.12–14 for
specific instructions. For a figure that does not use axes, such as a pie chart,
provide a unit indicator for the figure as a whole.
13.8 Placement and format of the unit indicator for a figure without axes. The unit
indicator is placed below the title but above the figure. It is typically set flush
left, in italics, and lowercased, but editors should defer to the series template.

13.9 Content. Abbreviations and symbols may be used, but avoid a single symbol
standing alone (for example, %). Nonstandard and previously defined abbrevia-
tions and symbols should be defined in a general note in each figure. Standard
abbreviations and symbols do not need to be defined. The word in should not
be used (for example, R$, millions, not in R$ millions).

COMPOSITION

13.10 Consistency. All like figures should be treated consistently.

13.11 Axes. Use a single-digit zero at the intersection of the x axes and y axes (that
is, 0, not 0.00). To the extent possible, the axes should be at full scale to show
data accurately. Unneeded zeroes should be deleted (for example, 3.0, 3.5,
4.0 rather than 3.00, 3.50, 4.00).

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 41


13.12 Axis position when a graph shows negative numbers. In a graph with negative
numbers, a dashed or dotted line should be placed at zero; an axis with tick
marks, labels, and axis title should be placed on the outside of the graph.
“Outside the graph” for the x axis means at the base of the figure; for the y
axis, it is at the left of the figure. Please see the accompanying graphs on
page 43 for examples.

13.13 Axis titles. All axes must have titles with unit indicators. The titles should use
sentence-style capitalization.

13.14 Position of axis titles. Y-axis titles are positioned parallel to the axis and are
centered along its length. X-axis titles are centered below the axis, except
when placed per section 13.12.

13.15 X-axis labels. X-axis labels may be positioned either horizontally or, when
space is tight, on a slant. They should not be perpendicular to the x-axis.

13.16 Gridlines and frames. All gridlines, other than the axes, should be removed
from the figure. It may be appropriate to leave a rule at 0 for clarity (when the
figure includes negative data points). Figures should not be framed by a box
unless frames are specified by the series template.

13.17 Data lines. Typically, data points should be removed from lines in a line graph.
Color or line patterns should be used to differentiate the data lines from each
other.

13.18 Keys/legends and line labels. The text in keys/legends and line labels should
follow sentence-style capitalization. Abbreviations and symbols may be used
in keys/legends and line labels, but avoid a single symbol standing alone (for
example, %). Define nonstandard and previously defined abbreviations and
symbols in a note. Standard abbreviations and symbols do not need to be
defined.

13.19 Country and economy names and codes. Country and economy names in
figures should follow the World Bank listing provided in appendix C of this
guide. If country and economy codes are used within the figure to identify
data points, it is not necessary to provide a key or to refer readers to an online
listing. Country and economy codes are listed in appendix I of this guide.

13.20 Notes. Superscript letters should be used for notes within the figure.

SOURCES

13.21 Sources for figures are treated the same as sources for text. Content, including
data that are not original, needs a source citation.

• Use author-date style to refer readers to a publication. However, note that


parentheses are not used around the dates in source lines. Make sure that
the full bibliographic information is included in the reference list at the end
of each chapter.

42 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


40

Editorial Style Guide 2015


World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 43
• The World Bank Legal Department has directed that a source line of
“Authors” should not be used because it can create confusion over copy-
right ownership. In some cases, chapter authors may feel strongly that their
contribution is not adequately acknowledged if individual authorship is not
included in the source line; in these cases, make sure to include alternatives
with the word "original" as noted in the examples that follow.

Examples

If figures are original and use text and not data, list “World Bank” as the
source. “Original calculations for this publication” and “Original figure
for this publication” are acceptable alternatives.

If figures use World Bank data, then cite the data source as specifically
as possible, for example, “World Development Indicators Database.” In
the absence of this information, provide a note specifying “World Bank
data” as the source. It is acceptable to start the source line with “An
elaboration of …” or “based on …” or similar language such as “Original
calculations based on...” or “Original figure based on...”.

If figures use non-Bank data owned by a third party, then use a standard
source line.

If figures are (a) owned by a third party (not the World Bank) and
(b) require permission for use, then use the following line: “Source:
[author-date citation], ©[copyright owner]. Reproduced with permission
from [copyright owner]; further permission required for reuse.”

NOTES

13.22 General note. The word Note—always singular, in italics, with an initial cap,
and followed by a colon—precedes the general note. Nonstandard abbrevia-
tions and symbols should be defined in the general note. If the figure uses
country codes, it is not necessary to provide a key or to refer readers to an
online listing.

13.23 Order. Follow the order for notes specified in Chicago 3.76.

• Source notes appear first.

• General notes (including definitions of nonstandard abbreviations and


symbols) appear second.

• Specific (lettered) notes appear third.

• Notes on significance or probability levels appear last (Chicago 3.80).

Example

Sources: WHO 2019; World Bank 2018.


Note: Data refer to Eastern Europe and Central Asia. SNA = Survey of
National Accounts; — = not available.
a. Data for Romania are for 2001–11.
*p < .05   **p < .01   ***p < .001.

If authors include the significance levels, then style them as follows:


Significance level: * = 10 percent, ** = 5 percent, *** = 1 percent.

44 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


13.24 Specific notes. Specific notes are preceded by full-size lowercase letters, they
are not raised or superscript, and they are followed by a period. Reference
letters within the figure are superscript.

MAPS

13.25 Map numbering. Maps should be referenced individually in the text and titled
as “maps” rather than “figures.” Maps should be numbered separately from
figures, using the same two-digit numbering convention as for figures and
tables. Every map should have a source line and a corresponding text callout.

Written permission from the originator is needed for maps taken from copy-
righted sources.

Maps should be organized as separate Illustrator/eps files by chapter as well


as low-resolution PDFs. The naming convention should include each map by
number both in the file name and in the document.

Examples

Map 1_1.eps
Map 1_2.eps
Map 2_1.eps
Map 2_2.eps
Map A_1.eps

No maps should show the country of India, other than as part of the region or
world. Individual province maps are acceptable; however, the provinces of
Jammu Kashmir, Azad Jammu Kashmir, and Arunachal Pradesh should not be
depicted. The three provinces also should not appear in tables, figures, or
text. Appendix H of this guide provides guidance on the proper treatment of
countries, territories, and special cases.

PHOTOGRAPHS

13.26 Photograph numbering, callouts, and sources. Photographs should be


referenced individually in the text and titled as “photos.” Photographs should
be numbered separately from other graphic elements, using the same
two-digit numbering convention as for figures and tables. Every photograph
should have a source line and a corresponding text callout.

Photographs must list the copyright holder in the source line. The source line
must follow one of two conventions:

• World Bank photographs: © Scott Wallace / World Bank. Further permission


required for reuse.

• Non–World Bank photographs: © Ami Vitale / Panos Pictures. Used with the
permission of Ami Vitale / Panos Pictures. Further permission required for
reuse.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 45


CHECKLIST AND EXAMPLES FOR FIGURES

13.27 Checklist for editing figures. To ensure figures are consistent with World Bank
style, refer to the following checklist.

CHECKLIST FOR EDITING WORLD BANK FIGURES

___ Agreement with text: Have you confirmed that the data in the text and in
figures, maps, and tables agree?

___ Units: Have you spelled out the units for both x and y axes?

___ Country and economy names: Have you listed the country and economy
names according to the World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style
Guide, appendix C?

___ Legends: Have you provided a legend or interior labels, if needed (and
used consistent treatment throughout)?

___ Punctuation: Have you used commas in four-digit numbers (for example,
“3,280”)?

___ Symbols:
a. Have you instructed the typesetter to use the negative sign rather than
a hyphen to precede a negative number?
b. Have you used or instructed the typesetter to use en-dashes for
inclusive numbers and dates, for example, “2011–13”?

___ Decimals: If there are decimals with two digits on an axis, have you
checked that the whole numbers have a zero? For example, “0.3, 0.35,
0.4, 0.45” should be changed to “0.30, 0.35, 0.40, 0.45.”

___ Consistency in style:


a. Are the points the same shape (for example, dots versus diamonds) for
all figures in scatterplots?
b. Have you instructed the typesetter to remove unnecessary clutter, such
as gridlines or surrounding boxes?
c. Have you followed a consistent style for commas versus parentheses for
unit breakdown, either “US$, millions” or “US$ (millions)”?
d. Have you followed a consistent treatment for months? For example, do
“2012M1, 1/2012, 2012/M01, J 12, and Jan. 2012” all refer to the same
thing?
e. Have you treated quintiles and quartiles consistently, for example, “Q1
2015,” “quartile 1,” or “first quartile” with an explanation in the note?

___ Subparts: Have you added “a., b.,” and text subheadings for subparts of
figures?

___ Notes: Have you used letters for specific notes, which should be set
separate from the general note?

13.28 Examples of edited figures. The preferred method of indicating revisions to


figures is to insert queries to authors and instructions to the typesetter directly
under the figures in the manuscript Word files.

46 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


Example 1.

Figure 1.6 Core Public Sector Employment in Iraq, 2003–15

<TS: y-axis title (left) = Employees (millions); y-axis title (right) = Share of all jobs
(%). Add a y axis with ticks. Legends = Employees, core public sector; Core public
sector jobs per total jobs (right scale). For axis labels: on left, add “.0” to 0, 1, 2, 3;
on right, remove % signs. Stet numbers on orange line, but add data points.>

Sources: Iraq Ministry of Finance data; World Development Indicators data, quoted in
World Bank 2017b.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 47


Example 2.

Figure 2.1 Pledges Made at the International Donor


Conference for Iraq Reconstruction, October 2003

<TS: add “US$” before all numbers and “millions” after all numbers (except for
3,000, 5,000, and 33,000, which should change to 3, 5, and 33 billion, respectively).
Spell IMF = International Monetary Fund; UK = United Kingdom; EU/EC =
European Union/European Commission; US = United States. >

<Note to editors: A second option for the treatment of abbreviations in figures is to leave
them in place in the figures and spell them out in a Note under the Source line. For
example:
Note: EU/EC = European Union/European Commission; IMF = International Monetary
Fund; UK = United Kingdom; US = United States.>

48 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


Example 3.

Figure 3.3 Electricity Supply from the National Grid in Iraq, 2007 and 2011–12

Sources: CSO, KRSO, and United Nations 2011; CSO, KRSO, and World Bank 2007, 2011.

<TS: Remove grid lines and add a y axis with ticks. The y-axis title = Hours per day.
Instead of oval, add a background (color 11) behind the first 3 sets of bars. Add
color 11 to the legend and label it Kurdistan region.>

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 49


Example 4.

Figure 3.8 Infant Mortality Rate versus Life Expectancy at Birth in


the Middle East and North Africa, 1980 and 2001

1980 2001

Source: World Development Indicators database (World Bank, various years).

<TS: Change these country names as follows:


Egypt, Arab Rep.
Iran, Islamic Rep.
Syrian Arab Republic
y-axis title = Infant mortality rate (deaths per 1,000 live births)
x-axis title = Life expectancy at birth (years)
Add tick marks to both axes. Stet black for the arrow in the middle as shown.
Set solid lines, no dashed or dotted lines. All lines begin on the left with the 1980 dot
and end on the right with the 2001 dot.>

50 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


Example 5.

Figure 4.17 Probability of Receiving Tax Incentives in Rwanda, by Size of Firm


Revenue, 2013–16

<fig source> Source: Bode, Lohmann, and Steenbergen 2017.

<fig note> Note: Firm revenue in decile and tax incentives, 2013–16. CGAR = compound

annual growth rate.

<TS: Turn y-axis labels right reading, and add a zero before the decimal point. Both
axis titles should be set in sentence-style capitalization. Replace x-axis labels with 1 –
10 (1 on left, 10 on right). Remove box around graph. The line at zero should be
50% black dashed.>

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 51


Example 6.
Figure 2.1 More urbanized countries tend to have higher levels of income…

Sources: The globally consistent calculation of the urban population share is based on
application of the Uchida and Nelson (2010) agglomeration index to Landscan-2012
gridded population data. GDP per capita is from World Bank, World Development
Indicators.

<TS: Move the equation to the upper left quadrant of the graph so that it doesn't
interfere with the graph or axis. The "y", "x", and "R" of the equation should be
italic. In the y-axis title, “constant” should be lowercase. Set the dotted line as the
trend line (change it to solid); the lines on either side of it should be a different
color.>

Note to editors: As this figure shows, we allow the use of sentence-style


capitalization and ellipses in some of our books. The production editor will provide
guidance in each case.

52 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


Example 7.

Figure 2.35 Urban households are less deprived than rural households on a wide range of health and
education outcomes, 2016
Share of households without access (%)

Source: Adapted from Lain (2018), using data from Indonesia’s National Socio-Economic Survey
(SUSENAS).

Note: Households include a young child lacking full immunizations.

<TS: Make the web 50% black solid lines. Change “Non-metro” to “Nonmetro.”
Change the final 2 legend entries from solid lines to dashed lines. Delete parentheses
around 2018.>

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 53


Example 8.

Figure 6.14 Higher resources do not differentially increase market access, 1997–
2014

Sources: Calculations based on data from BPS and Indonesia’s National Socio-Economic
Survey (SUSENAS).
Note: The bars indicate, for each year, the differential evolution of the point variables of
interest between treated (low-population, high-resource) districts, and nontreated (high-
population, low-resource) districts. The blue dots are the point estimates, with a positive
value denoting that treated districts’ position improved in relative terms, and the blue line
shows the 95 percent confidence interval. FP = favored provinces; HRD = high-resource
districts; HRD-PP = high-resource districts in favored provinces; HRD-RP = high-
resource districts in unfavored provinces; LRD-RP = low-resource districts in favored
provinces.

<TS: Remove grid lines; add a y axis with tick marks, and add ticks to the x axis.
Make the round dots and the horizontal bars at the ends of each vertical line blue;
and the vertical line make black. Make the line at zero black dashed.>

54 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


14. TA B L E S

14.1 Further reference. For additional information, refer to the formal publishing
program’s composition guidelines. Also refer to Chicago chapter 3.

14.2 Text references. Each table should be discussed, by number, in the text. Tables
not directly pertinent to the text but of interest to readers should be placed in
an annex to the chapter or an appendix to the book.

14.3 Numbering. Every table should have a number. Tables are numbered sepa-
rately from boxes and figures unless they appear within a box (refer to section
12.5 of this guide). Double numeration is typically used (for example, table
3.1), and the number is placed above the table.

• Box tables: Every table within a box needs a number and title. In the text
box, any tables are numbered according to the following example for the
first table in box 2.1: Table B2.1.1.

• Overview tables: Tables in an overview use the two-digit convention with


the letter “O” (for example, table O.1 is the first table in an overview).

• Annex tables: Tables in a chapter annex have the annex letter inserted after
the chapter number (for example, table 3A.1 is the first figure in the first
annex to chapter 3).

• Appendix tables: Tables in an appendix use the appendix letter in place of


the chapter number (for example, table B.3 is the third table in appendix B).

14.4 Long tables. For vertical tables that are too long to fit on one page, the
typesetter will set “continued”—in italics and preceded by the table number—
at the top of each page after the first (for example, “Table 14.5 continued”).
Column heads are repeated on all pages.

For broadside tables, “continued” is set on all pages, and column heads are
repeated on all pages. A drop folio is used. Editors should query authors with
options to see if they wish to avoid long or broadside tables.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 55


TITLES

14.5 Placement and format. Table titles are placed above the table, following the
table number. They should use headline-style capitalization (refer to Chicago
8.159–161) unless the series template specifies otherwise.

14.6 Content. Titles should be descriptive, covering “What,” “Where,” and


“When.” They should not include background information, repeat column
heads, or describe results illustrated by the table. Ellipses or dashes should not
be used to connect one table title to the next.

Geographic areas and dates, if relevant, should be placed at the end of the
title. Use judgment in determining whether such information is needed. For
example, the country name likely is not needed in a book that focuses entirely
on one country.

Abbreviations within the title should be avoided but are acceptable in most
cases. The preference is to avoid using the World Bank’s regional abbrevia-
tions: AFR or SSA, EAP, ECA, LAC, MNA or MENA, and SAR.

UNIT INDICATORS

14.7 Placement and format. When a single unit indicator applies to the entire table,
it is placed below the title but above the table. It is typically set flush left, in
italics, and lowercased (unless it is a phrase, in which case sentence-style
capitalization should be applied), but defer to the series template. When more
than one unit indicator is used within a table, the unit indicators follow the
appropriate column heads or stub entries.

14.8 Content. Abbreviations and symbols may be used in the unit indicator, but
avoid a single symbol standing alone (for example, %) when the unit indicator
is placed below the title. Define nonstandard and previously defined abbrevia-
tions and symbols in a note. Standard abbreviations and symbols do not need
to be defined. The word in should not be used (for example, R$, millions, not
in R$ millions).

COLUMN HEADS

14.9 Capitalization. Every column should have a heading. Sentence-style capitaliza-


tion is typically used in column heads, unless the series template stipulates a
different style.

14.10 Alignment. Column heads that run more than one line should align on the last
line of the heads.

14.11 Unit indicators. When unit indicators are given for individual columns, they are
lowercased and placed in parentheses following the column heads. Abbrevia-
tions and symbols may be used. Nonstandard and previously defined abbrevi-
ations and symbols should be defined at the end of a note. Standard
abbreviations and symbols do not need to be defined.

56 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


14.12 Content. Column heads should not end with colons or prepositions. Abbrevia-
tions and symbols may be used. Nonstandard and previously defined abbrevi-
ations and symbols should be defined in a note. Standard abbreviations and
symbols do not need to be defined.

If columns are numbered (for example, in regression tables), use arabic


numerals in parentheses.

STUB ENTRIES

14.13 Capitalization. Sentence-style capitalization is used in stub entries


(Chicago 3.59).

14.14 Order. Stub entries should be arranged in a readily apparent order


(for ­example, alphabetical or chronological, unless there is a contextual
reason for another order).

14.15 Unit indicators. When unit indicators are given for individual rows, they are
lowercased and placed in parentheses following the stub entry.

Abbreviations and symbols may be used. Define nonstandard and previously


defined abbreviations and symbols at the end of a note. Standard abbrevia-
tions and symbols do not need to be defined.

14.16 Content. Stub entries should not end with colons or prepositions.

Abbreviations and symbols may be used in stub entries. Define nonstandard


and previously defined abbreviations and symbols at the end of a note.
Standard abbreviations and symbols do not need to be defined.

14.17 Main entries and subentries. When no main entries are accompanied by data,
all main entries are set in italic, flush left, and are followed by subentries in
roman, flush left, unless the series template instructs otherwise. If any main
entry is accompanied by data, all main entries are set in roman, flush left, and
are followed by subentries set in roman and indented one em.

There is no need for a colon following a main entry.

TABLE BODY

14.18 Blank cells. Aside from tables of regressions, no blank cells should appear in
the table. Instead, use the symbols listed below. These symbols (other than 0)
should be defined in a general note. Insert queries to authors if blank cells are
present.

Not available —
Not applicable n.a.
Negligible ..
Zero 0

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 57


14.19 Decimals. Aside from probabilities, a zero should be placed before any
decimal that is less than one (for example, 0.25). Numbers that are to be
compared should have the same number of decimal places. If they do not,
query the author.

14.20 Notes. Superscript letters should be used for notes in the table body.

SOURCES

14.21 Sources. Use author-date style to refer readers to the source of a publication.
The source information is preceded by the word Source or Sources, in italics,
with an initial cap, and followed by a colon. Source information should
include the author’s last name and the year of publication, with the complete
bibliographic information provided in the chapter reference list. Parentheses
are not used around the dates in source lines.

The World Bank Legal Department has directed that a source line of “Authors”
should not be used because it can create confusion over copyright ownership.
In some cases, chapter authors may feel strongly that their contribution is not
adequately acknowledged if individual authorship is not included in the source
line; in that event, make sure to include alternatives with the word “original”
as noted in the examples that follow.

Examples

If tables are original and use text and not data, then list “World Bank” as
the source. “Original calculations for this publication” and “Original table
for this publication” are acceptable alternatives.

If tables use World Bank data, then cite the data source as specifically as
possible, for example, “World Development Indicators Database.” In the
absence of this information, provide a note specifying “World Bank data”
as the source. It is acceptable to start the source line with “An elaboration
of …” or “based on …” or similar language such as “Original calculations
based on...” or “Original figure based on...”.

If tables use non-Bank data owned by a third party, then use a


standard source line.

If tables are (a) owned by a third party (not the World Bank) and
(b) require permission for use, then use the following line: “Source: [author-
date citation], ©[copyright owner]. Reproduced with permission from
[copyright owner]; further permission required for reuse.”

NOTES

14.22 Order. Follow the order specified in Chicago 3.76.

• Source notes appear first.


• General notes (including definitions of nonstandard abbreviations and
symbols) appear second.
• Specific (lettered) notes appear third.
• Notes on significance or probability levels appear last (Chicago 3.80).

58 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


Example

Sources: WHO 2009; World Bank 2011.


Note: Data refer to Eastern Europe and Central Asia. SNA = Survey of National Accounts;
— = not available.
a. Data for Romania are for 1999–2011.
*p < .05   **p < .01   ***p < .001

If authors include the significance levels, then style them as follows:


Significance level: * = 10 percent, ** = 5 percent, *** = 1 percent.

14.23 General note. The word Note—always singular, in italics, with an initial cap,
and followed by a colon—precedes the general note.

Nonstandard abbreviations and symbols should be defined at the end of a


general note and listed in alphabetical order.

14.24 Specific notes. Specific notes are preceded by full-size lowercase letters, they
are not raised or superscript, and they are followed by a period. Note refer-
ence letters in the table body are superscript.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 59


15. M AT H E M AT I C S

15.1 Further reference. For additional information, refer to Chicago chapter 12.

15.2 Consistency. Notation and typographical distinctions should be consistent.


Refer to Chicago 12.4.

15.3 Signs and symbols. Refer to Chicago 12.9–17 and table 12.1.

15.4 Standard abbreviations. Refer to Chicago table 12.2.

15.5 Delimiters. Refer to Chicago 12.26–35.

15.6 Subscripts and superscripts. Refer to Chicago 12.36–38.

15.7 Summations and integrals. Refer to Chicago 12.39–42.

15.8 Radicals. Refer to Chicago 12.43–44.

15.9 Fractions. Refer to Chicago 12.45–49.

15.10 Matrices and determinants. Refer to Chicago 12.50–51.

15.11 Scalars, vectors, and tensors. Refer to Chicago 12.52–55.

15.12 Definitions, theorems, and other formal statements. Refer to Chicago 12.56.

15.13 Probability and statistics. Refer to Chicago 12.57–59.

DISPLAYED EQUATIONS

15.14 When to display mathematical expressions. Refer to Chicago 12.21.

15.15 Line breaks. Refer to Chicago 12.23.

60 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


15.16 Numbering. Displayed mathematical expressions are always numbered. The
equation number may appear to either the left or the right of the expression
but should be placed consistently. Typically, a double-numeration system is
used, and the number, for example, (2.3), is enclosed in parentheses both in
the margin and in the textual cross-reference. Refer to Chicago 12.24.

PUNCTUATION

15.17 Multiple expressions in a single display. Refer to Chicago 12.18.

15.18 Single expression with multiple lines. Refer to Chicago 12.18.

15.19 End punctuation. Refer to Chicago 12.18.

15.20 Commas. Refer to Chicago 12.18–19.

15.21 Ellipses. Refer to Chicago 12.19–20. Ellipsis dots should be vertically centered
unless the multiplication dot is present, in which case they should be on the
baseline.

15.22 Minus signs. Do not use a hyphen or an en dash. Either use a minus sign
character, which can be found in Symbols or Character Map in Windows
(look in Programs, Accessories, System Tools), or instruct the typesetter to
set a minus sign. Refer to Chicago 6.84.

15.23 Multiplication cross. Refer to Chicago 12.15 and 12.20. An x should not be
used to represent a multiplication symbol. Editors should insert instructions to
the typesetter to set the mathematical symbol.

EDITING MATHEMATICS

15.24 Editors should ensure consistency between the way variables appear in the
text and the way they appear in displayed equations. For example, if a variable
is lowercased and italicized in the text, then it should be similarly styled in any
corresponding equation.

15.25 Italic characters. If the editing is done on hard copy, the manuscript editor
should clearly identify all italic characters. Refer to Chicago 12.63 and 12.65.

15.26 Ambiguous characters. If the editing is done on hard copy, the manuscript
editor should clearly identify any ambiguous characters. Refer to Chicago
12.64 and table 12.4.

15.27 Superscripts and subscripts. Refer to Chicago 12.67.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 61


16. D O C U M E N TAT I O N

16.1 Further reference. Please be familiar with Chicago chapters 14 and 15.

DOCUMENTATION SYSTEM: SOURCE CITATIONS

16.2 Author-date style. The author-date style is preferred. The use of notes is also
acceptable, but refer to sections 16.3 and 16.5 in this guide. The manuscript
editor should confer with the production editor before proceeding with notes.

When more than one source is cited in the text, editors should ensure the
sources are listed in alphabetical order. However, proofreaders should not
reorder sources at the page proof stage.

Example:

The cost of emergency obstetric care at a rural hospital in Bangladesh


was estimated to be US$11 per DALY averted (Debas 2019; Garrett,
Thomas, and Smith 2019; McCord and Chowdhury 2018).

For works by more than three authors, only the name of the first author is used,
followed by and others or et al. The choice should be applied consistently.
Follow the client’s preference if it is apparent. All of the author names are
included in the reference list.

When a specific page number or page numbers are needed in the text, the
page number follows the date, separated by a comma. The correct form is,
therefore, “(Johnson 2017, 12).”

When an organization is the author, the organizational abbreviation (if one


exists) should be used. Refer to the first example on the following page.

62 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


Examples: Text

Accessions to international agreements and institutions have accelerated


(UNCTAD 2019).

Trumbull and Wall (2018) estimate that ODA allocations are responsive to
the needs of recipient countries.

This result may reflect the importance of strategic and noneconomic


considerations in aid allocation (Alesina and Dollar 2015).

Investors do not value the foreign operations of multinational companies


as highly as the domestic (Christophe and Pfeiffer 2017; Denis and others
2017).

Intercompany loans may also substitute for costly external borrowing


when local capital markets are underdeveloped (Desai and others 2016a,
2016b).

The estimate of 2.5 million stillbirths based on an extrapolation of previous


estimates is very similar to a new estimate for 2015 of 2.6 million (Blencowe
and others, forthcoming).

Examples: Following figures, maps, and tables

Source: De la Fuente 2019.

Sources: De la Fuente 2019; World Bank 2018.

Sources: World Bank staff calculations based on data from the UN


Economic Commission 2011 and OECD 2012.

Refer to Chicago 15.21–31 for additional examples.

16.3 Notes. If notes are used, they should be placed as endnotes at the end of
each chapter, preceding the references.

REFERENCE LISTS AND BIBLIOGRAPHIES

16.4 Reference lists. Reference lists appear at the end of each chapter, following the
endnotes. In very limited cases, the production editor will decide if they may
go at the end of the book.

16.5 Bibliographies. When a list of sources includes uncited publications, it is called


a bibliography or a select bibliography, whichever is appropriate. Bibliographic
entries follow the same arrangement and format as entries in a reference list.

Bibliographies appear at the end of each chapter, although a book with


references at the end of a chapter may have a bibliography as part of the back
matter. If one chapter uses a bibliography, then the term bibliography should
be used for the source lists of all chapters.

Content
16.6 Minimum information needed. Complete source information is highly desir-
able, and the author should be queried for any missing pieces. However, if the

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 63


author has been queried and if the missing information is not forthcoming,
then the bare minimum that is needed is listed below.

• Books: author’s last name, date, and title

• Journals: author’s last name, date, article title, journal title, volume number
or year

• Informal publications: author’s last name, date, title, and description of


publication (for example, speech or conference paper)

16.7 Author names. Preferably the full name should be used. However, it is also
acceptable for initials to be used with the last name. Mixing of full names and
initials should be avoided but is permitted.

When the author is an organization, the organizational abbreviation (if one


exists) should be used followed by the full name in parentheses.

For books, the organization is also given as the publisher.

Examples

Batchelor, Roy A. 2019. “How Useful Are Forecasts of Intergovernmental


Agencies? The IMF and OECD versus the Consensus.” Applied
Economics 40 (2): 225–35.

Gunter, Frank R. 2016. “Capital Flight from the People’s Republic of


China: 1984–1994.” China Economic Review 24 (1): 77–96.

UNCTAD (United Nations Conference on Trade and Development).


2016. World Investment Report 2016: Non-equity Modes of Production
and Development. Geneva: UNCTAD.

Spell out the author’s name in every reference entry; do not use three-em
dashes for subsequent references by the same author. (Three-em dashes do not
work in computerized sorts and can hide entries from bibliographic databases.)

16.8 Multiple authors. Refer to Chicago 15.9. For the arrangement of entries, refer
to Chicago 15.16 and 15.18.

16.9 Titles. Refer to sections 7.16–32 in this guide.

16.10 Copublications. A few options exist for copublications. Refer to section 16.23
in this guide as well as Chicago 14.140. Whichever option is chosen, it should
be followed consistently.

16.11 Informal publications. The terms processed or mimeo are no longer used with
informal publications. Instead, the type of publication should be specified, and
any available information should be provided. The titles should be in quota-
tion marks. Refer to Chicago 14.215–220.

Titles use headline-style capitalization and are enclosed in quotation marks.

Material posted on the internet is considered published for copyright pur-


poses and should therefore be cited. Refer to Chicago 14.14.

16.12 Legal and public documents. Follow Chicago 14.269–305 and 15.58–59.
Chicago has adopted The Bluebook: A Uniform System of Citation, with the
ALWD Citation Manual: A Professional System of Citation as an alternative.

64 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


Bibliographic information for public documents is often best placed in a note
rather than in the reference list (for example, surveys that occur annually and
for which multiple years are being cited).
It is not necessary to include laws and statutes, which are easily obtained from
multiple sources, in the reference list if the full name of the law or statute has
been provided in the text.

16.13 Social media, email, and other personal communications. Refer to Chicago
14.209–214 and 15.52–53.

16.14 Databases. Refer to Chicago 14.257. Databases can be problematic in an


author-date citation system. In such cases, they may be cited in a note.

Examples

BOOKS

16.15 One author.


EBRD (European Bank for Reconstruction and Development). 2018. Transition
Report 2005: Agriculture and Rural Transition. London: EBRD.
Goldstein, Morris. 2019. The Asian Financial Crisis: Causes, Cures, and Systemic
Implications. Washington, DC: Institute for International Economics.
If there are two or more references for an author that have the same year of publication,
use “a” and “b” to distinguish them in text (for example, 2019a and 2019b); in the
reference list, put the two entries in alpha order by title.

16.16 Multiple authors.


Broadman, Harry G., James Anderson, Constantijn A. Claessens, Randi
Ryterman, Stefka Slavova, Maria Vagliasindi, and Gallina A.
Vincelette. 2015. Building Market Institutions in South Eastern
Europe: Comparative Prospects for Investment and Private Sector
Development. Washington, DC: World Bank.
Scherer, Frederick M., and David Ross. 2012. Industrial Market Structure and
Economic Performance. 3rd ed. New York: Houghton-Mifflin.

16.17 Editor in place of an author.


Broadman, Harry, ed. 2013. Unleashing Russia’s Business Potential: Lessons
from the Regions for Building Market Institutions. Washington, DC:
World Bank.

16.18 Print and electronic versions.


World Bank. 2018. World Bank Annual Report 2018. Washington, DC: World
Bank. https://openknowledge.worldbank.org/handle/10986/30326.

16.19 Chapter in an edited volume.


Ajayi, S. Ibi. 2017. “Capital Flight and External Debt in Nigeria.” In External
Debt and Capital Flight in Sub-Saharan Africa, edited by S. Ibi Ajayi and
Mohsin S. Khan, 25–34. Washington, DC: International Monetary Fund.

16.20 Forthcoming works.


Kaplan, Ethan, and Dani Rodrik. Forthcoming. “Did the Malaysian Capital
Controls Work?” In Preventing Currency Crises in Emerging Markets,
edited by Sebastian Edwards and Jeffrey Frankel. Chicago: University of
Chicago Press.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 65


16.21 Series.
van der Gaag, Jacques. 2017. Private and Public Initiatives Working Together
for Health and Education. Directions in Development Series.
­Washington, DC: World Bank.

16.22 Multivolume works.


World Bank. 2012. Global Development Finance 2012: Financing the Poorest
Countries. 2 vols. Washington, DC: World Bank.
World Bank. 2012. Analysis and Summary Tables. Vol. 1 of Global Develop-
ment Finance 2012: Financing the Poorest Countries. Washington, DC:
World Bank.

16.23 Copublications. (Individual publications should be treated consistently.)

Option 1
Stiglitz, Joseph, and Shahid Yusuf, eds. 2012. Rethinking the East Asian
Miracle. Washington, DC: World Bank.

Option 2
Stiglitz, Joseph, and Shahid Yusuf, eds. 2012. Rethinking the East Asian
Miracle. New York: Oxford University Press.

Option 3
Stiglitz, Joseph, and Shahid Yusuf, eds. 2012. Rethinking the East Asian
Miracle. Washington, DC: World Bank; New York: Oxford University
Press.

16.24 Languages other than English. (Titles normally use sentence-style capitaliza-
tion; see section 7.28 of this guide.)
Boeri, Tito. 2012. Uno stato asociale: Perché è fallito il welfare in Italia. Bari,
Italy: Laterza.

JOURNAL ARTICLES
(Enclose article titles in quotation marks, and use headline-style capitalization.)

16.25 Standard listing.


Gunter, Frank R. 2016. “Capital Flight from the People’s Republic of China:
1984–94.” China Economic Review 24 (1): 77–96.
Cashin, Paul, and C. John McDermott. 2019. “An Unbiased Appraisal of
Purchasing Power Parity.” IMF Staff Papers 66 (3): 321–52.

16.26 No issue number.


Fernández-Arias, Eduardo, and Peter J. Montiel. 2012. “The Surge in Capital
Inflows to Developing Countries: An Analytical Overview.” World Bank
Economic Review 26: 51–77.

16.27 Month instead of issue number.


Benhabib, Jess, and Mark M. Spiegel. 2018. “The Role of Human Capital in
Economic Development: Evidence from Aggregate Cross-Country
Data.” Journal of Monetary Economics 58 (October): 143–73.

66 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


INFORMAL PUBLICATIONS
(Refer to Chicago 14.215–220 and 15.53. Publication titles should be enclosed in
quotation marks, and headline-style capitalization should be used.)

16.28 Working paper.


Barth, James, Gerard Caprio Jr., and Ross Levine. 2018. “Bank Regulation and
Supervision: What Works Best?” Policy Research Working Paper 2725,
World Bank, Washington, DC.
Holzmann, Robert, and Steen Lau Jorgensen. 2013. “Social Risk Management:
A New Conceptual Framework for Social Protection and Beyond.” Social
Protection Discussion Paper 0006, Human Development Network,
World Bank, Washington, DC.

16.29 Paper presented at a conference. (Include the date of the conference.)


Kearney, John. 2019. “FDI Confidence Index: Flash Survey.” Paper presented
at the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development
Global Forum on International Investment, “New Horizons and Policy
Challenges for Foreign Direct Investment in the 21st Century,” Mexico
City, November 26–27.

16.30 Conference paper in print and electronic formats.


Corsetti, Biancarlo, Paolo Pesenti, and Nouriel Roubini. 1998. “Fundamen-
tal Determinants of the Asian Crisis: A Preliminary Empirical Assess-
ment.” Paper prepared for the Journal of International Money and
Finance and Fordham University Conference, “Perspectives on the
Financial Crisis in Asia,” New York, October 16, 1998. http://pages​
.­stern.nyu.edu/~nroubini/asia/jimf06.pdf. (Note: the repetition of
the year is a new rule in Chicago 15.14.)

16.31 News release.


UNCTAD (United Nations Conference on Trade and Development). 2015.
“FDI Downturn in 2001 Touches Almost All Regions.” Press Release
TAD/INF/PR36, January 21, 2002.

16.32 Background paper.


World Bank. 2018. “Productivity.” Background paper, From Uneven Growth to
Inclusive Development: Romania’s Path to Shared Prosperity, World
Bank, Washington, DC.

PUBLIC DOCUMENTS

16.33 Report.
Uganda, Ministry of Health. 2012. Exploring the Potential for Community
Health Insurance and Prepayment Schemes: Towards the Development
of Alternative Health Financing Options in Uganda, by John Arube-
Wani. Consultant report, Kampala.

ELECTRONIC PUBLICATIONS
Chicago offers guidance with respect to many types of issues related to electronic
publications. For information about general considerations such as electronic
resource identifiers, URLs, DOIs, authority and permanence, and source citation
software, refer to Chicago 14.6–18.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 67


16.34 Electronic books.
World Bank Institute. 2019. Procurement in World Bank Financed Projects.
Washington, DC: World Bank. CD-ROM, version 4.0.
Stiglitz, Joseph E. 2002. Globalization and Its Discontents. New York:
W. W. Norton. Kindle edition.
Easterly, William. 2012. The White Man’s Burden: Why the West’s Efforts to Aid
the Rest Have Done So Much Ill and So Little Good. New York: Penguin
Press. Microsoft Reader e-book.
World Bank. 2003. World Bank Annual Report 2003. Washington, DC:
World Bank. https://openknowledge.worldbank.org/handle/10986/13929.
World Bank. 2015. World Development Report 2015: Mind, Society, and
Behavior. Washington, DC: World Bank. doi:10.1596//978-1-4648-0342-0.
Smith, Adam. 1776. An Inquiry into the Nature and Causes of the Wealth of
Nations. Project Gutenberg, 2009. http://www.gutenberg.org
/files/3300/3300-h/3300-h.htm.

16.35 Electronic journals.


Hanushek, Eric A., and Dennis D. Kimko. 2012. “Schooling, Labor Force
Quality, and the Growth of Nations.” American Economic Review
102 (5):1184–208. http://www.jstor.org/stable/2677847.
Dovern, Jonas, and Peter Nunnenkamp. 2018. “Aid and Growth
­Accelerations: An Alternative Approach to Assessing the ­Effectiveness
of Aid.” Kyklos 71 (3): 359–83. doi:10.1111/j.1467-6435.2007.00376.x.
Swindle, Jeffrey. 2018. “The Tough Realities Small NGOs Face When Evaluating
Their Efforts: Observations from Guatemala and ­Mexico.” Consilience
13 (1): 251–63. http://www.consiliencejournal.org/index.php/consilience​
/­article/viewFile/179/68.
Zhang, Haiyang, and Tetsushi Sonobe. 2011. “The Development of Science
and Technology Parks in China, 1988–2008.” Economics 5 (2011-6).
doi:10.5018/economicsejournal.ja.2011-6.

16.36 Electronic magazines.


Acemoglu, Daron. 2009. “What Makes a Nation Rich? One Economist’s Big
Answer.” Esquire, November 18, 2009. http://www.esquire.com​
/­features/best-and-brightest-2009/world​-­poverty-map-1209.
King, Ian. 2010. “Intel Wants to Be Inside Everything.” Bloomberg
Businessweek, September 2, 2010. http://www.businessweek.com​
/­magazine/content/10_37/b4194029898101.htm.

16.37 Electronic informal publications.


Krugman, Paul. 2012. “Analytical Afterthoughts on the Asian Crisis.”
­Massachusetts Institute of Technology. http://web.mit.edu/krugman​
/www/MINICRIS.htm.
Görg, Holger, Aoife Hanley, and Eric Strobl. 2010. “FDI in Ireland: New
Findings for Grants and Local Partnerships.” VoxEU.org, October 5,
2010. http://www.voxeu.org/index.php?q=node/5619.

16.38 Blogs and social media.


Booth, David. 2018. “Can Aid Become More Relevant to ‘Getting Things
Done?’” Governance for Development (blog), October 24, 2018.
http://blogs.worldbank.org/governance/.

68 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


Krugman, Paul (@paulkrugman). 2019. “Public investment in infrastructure
is clearly something we should be doing.” Twitter, February 4, 2019,
6:53 a.m. https://twitter.com/paulkrugman/status/109243608​
5408518144.
Mankiw, Greg. 2014. “More on a Nominal GDP Target.” Greg Mankiw’s Blog:
Random Observations for Students of Economics, October 29, 2014.
http://gregmankiw.blogspot.com/.
Stiglitz, Joseph. 2018. “It isn’t inevitable to have a globalization which is used by
corporations for tax avoidance and the threat of moving jobs abroad to
lower wages.” Facebook, October 5, 2018. https://www.facebook​.­com​
/­JosephEStiglitz/.

16.39 Online dictionaries and encyclopedias.


Entries in online dictionaries can be problematic to the author-date citation
system and may be better placed in notes than in references.
Online encyclopedia articles often are dated and include an author name.
In such cases, they should be included in the reference list.

Example: As a note

1. As defined in Oxford Dictionary of Economics, s.v. “ad valorem tax,”


http://www.enotes.com/econ-encyclopedia/ad-valorem-tax.

Example: As a reference entry

Cogan, John F. 2001. “Federal Budget.” In The Concise Encyclopedia of


Economics. http://www.econlib.org/library/Enc1/FederalBudget.html.

16.40 Databases.

If database does not appear in the title of a database, then it should be


indicated as such in parentheses following the title. Location and access dates
should be provided, if possible. Databases can be problematic to the author-
date citation system and may be better placed in notes than in references.
Examples: As a source line for a figure or table

Source: Projects Database (Uttar Pradesh State Roads Project), World


Bank, Washington, DC (accessed January 14, 2018), http://worldbank
.org/projects.

Source: Doing Business Indicators (database), World Bank, Washington,


DC (accessed March 2, 2015), http://www.doingbusiness.org.

Examples: As a note

Data in this section are from the Projects Database of the Uttar Pradesh
State Roads Project, World Bank, Washington, DC (accessed January
14, 2018), http://worldbank.org/projects.

Economy data for Algeria are from Doing Business Indicators (database),
World Bank, Washington, DC (accessed March 2, 2015), http://www
.doingbusiness.org.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 69


16.41 Websites.

Websites are best placed in a note rather than in the reference list because
their usefulness in terms of finding the source material is often limited and
because undated material is problematic to the author-date citation system.
Refer to Chicago 14.205–207. Include the protocol (for example, http://) in
the Web address. If possible, URLs should not be presented alone but should
include text explaining their content.

Examples: As a note

For more information about the company, see Keppel’s website at


http://www.kepcorp.com/en/content.aspx?sid=80.
For an overview of global issues addressed by the United Nations, see
the UN website at http://www.un.org/en/globalissues/.

REFERENCE LISTS

16.42 Example of a reference list.

Reminder: It is preferable to place source information for websites, databases,


and online dictionaries in notes. Government publications (such as the Uganda
entries on the next page) would be better placed in a note than in the
reference list.
Ahmed, Masood. 2013. “What to Do about Unemployment in Caucasus and Central
Asia.” iMFdirect (blog), October 31, 2013. http://blog-imfdirect.imf.org.
Albarran, Alan B. 2008. “Media Economics.” In The International Encyclopedia of
Communication, edited by Wolfgang Donsbach.
doi:10.1111/b.9781405131995.2008.
Barysch, Katinka. 2004. “EU Enlargement: How to Reap the Benefits.” Economic
Trends 2: 28–31. http://www.cer.org.uk/sites/default/files/barysch
_economictrends_june%2004.pdf.
Bernanke, Ben (@benbernanke). “The Fed shouldn’t shrink its balance sheet until
short-term interest rates are well away from effective lower bound.” Twitter,
January 26, 2017, 7:22 a.m. https://twitter.com/benbernanke/status​
/824638528583708672.
Chang, Pao-Long, Chintay Shih, and Chiung-Wen Hsu. 1994. “The Formation Process of
Taiwan’s IC Industry: Method of Technology Transfer.” Technovation 14 (3): 161–71.
Chen, Tain-Jy. 2015. “Technical Change and Technical Adaptation of Multinational
Firms.” Economic Development and Cultural Change 40 (4): 867–81.
Chen, Tain-Jy, Been-Lon Chen, and Yun-Peng Chu. 2011. “The Development of
Taiwan’s Electronics Industry.” Paper presented at the Sasakawa Peace
Foundation conference, “Rethinking the East Asian Development Paradigm,”
Tokyo, November 28–29.
Dahlman, Carl J. 2011. “Technology Strategy in East Asian Developing Economies.”
Journal of Asian Economics 5 (Winter): 541–72.
Deutschman, Alan. 2005. “Building a Better Movie Business.” Fast Company, December,
2005. http://www.fastcompany.com/54853/building-better-movie-business.
Devereux, Stephen, and Larissa Pelham. 2005. “Making Cash Count: Lessons from
Cash Transfer Schemes in East and Southern Africa for Supporting the Most
Vulnerable Children and Households.” Save the Children UK, HelpAge
International, and Institute of Development Studies, London. http://www.ids.ac
.uk/files/MakingCashCountfinal.pdf.
Economist. 2011. “A Bridge Too Far?” June 9, 2011. http://www.economist.com
/node/4031129.
Engardio, Pete. 2009. “Singapore’s One North.” Bloomberg Businessweek, June 1,
2012. http://www.businessweek.com/innovate/content/jun2009​
/­id2009061_019963.htm.

70 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


Estache, Antonio. 2012. “Emerging Infrastructure Policy Issues in Developing
Countries: A Survey of the Recent Economic Literature.” Background paper,
World Bank, Washington, DC.
Estache, Antonio, Andres Gomez-Lobo, and Danny Leipziger. 2012. “Utility Privatiza-
tions and the Poor’s Needs in Latin America: Have We Learnt Enough to Get It
Right?” Paper presented at the conference, “Infrastructure for Development:
Private Solutions and the Poor,” sponsored by the Public-Private Infrastructure
Advisory Facility, the UK, Department for International Development, and the
World Bank, London, May 31–June 2, 2012.
Estache, Antonio, and Tomás Serebrisky. 2011. “Where Do We Stand on Transport
Infrastructure Deregulation and Public-Private Partnership?” Policy Research
Working Paper 3315, World Bank, Washington, DC.
Florida, Richard. 2011. Rise of the Creative Class. New York: Basic Books. Kindle
edition.
Florida, Richard. 2019. “U.S. mayors are split on whether business incentives are good
politics, but most believe—despite evidence to the contrary—that they’re good
policy.” Facebook, February 7, 2019. https://www.facebook.com/Richard​
-­Florida-280441314596/.
Friedman, Thomas L. 2012. The World Is Flat: A Brief History of the Twenty-
First Century (Further Updated and Expanded). New York: Farrar,
Strauss and Giroux. Nook e-book.
High, Kamau. 2005. “American Gamers Get Their Adventures Direct from Japan.”
Financial Times, October 25, 2005. http://www.ft.com/home/us.
Hu, Angang. 2002. “Knowledge and Development: The New Catch-Up Strategy.” In
China’s Future in the Knowledge Economy: Engaging the New World, edited by
Bhajan Grewal, Lan Xue, Peter Sheehan, and Fiona Sun, 240–69. Beijing:
Tsinghua University Press; Melbourne: Victoria University, Centre for Strategic
Economic Studies.
Keynes, John Maynard. 1920. The Economic Consequences of the Peace. Project
Gutenberg, 2005. http://www.gutenberg.org/files/15776/15776-h/15776-h.htm.
Lewis, Michael. 2011. “When Irish Eyes Are Crying.” Vanity Fair, March, 2011. http://
www.vanityfair.com/business/features/2011/03/michael-lewis-ireland-201103.
Lim, L. Y. C. 1978. “Multinational Firms and Manufacturing for Export in Less Devel-
oped Countries: The Case of the Electronics Industry in Malaysia and Singa-
pore.” PhD thesis, University of Michigan.
Lucky, Robert. 2012. “The Quickening of Science Communication.” Science 289
(5477): 259–89. doi:10.1126/science.289.5477.259.
Makinen, Marty, Leo Deville, and Amanda Folsom. 2012. Assessment of
the Private Sector in the Republic of Congo. A World Bank Study. Washington,
DC: World Bank. doi:10.1596/978-0-8213-9705-3.
Mathews, John A. 2012a. “Competitive Advantages of the Latecomer Firm:
A Resource-Based Account of Industrial Catch-Up Strategies.” Asia Pacific
Journal of Management 19 (4): 467–88.
Mathews, John A. 2012b. “The Origins and Dynamics of Taiwan’s R&D Consortia.”
Research Policy 31 (4): 633–51.
Mathews, John A. Forthcoming. Strategizing, Disequilibrium, and Profit. Stanford, CA:
Stanford University Press.
Mathews, John A., and Dong-Song Cho. 2000. Tiger Technology: The Creation of a
Semiconductor Industry in East Asia. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University
Press.
Trucano, Michael. 2011. “Surveying ICT Use in Education in Brazil.” EduTech (blog),
October 31, 2011. http://blogs.worldbank.org/edutech/.
Uganda, Ministry of Finance, Planning, and Economic Development. 1996. Statistical
Abstracts. Uganda Bureau of Statistics, Kampala.
Uganda, Ministry of Finance, Planning, and Economic Development. 2011. Statistical
Abstracts. Uganda Bureau of Statistics, Kampala.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 71


Uganda, Ministry of Finance, Planning, and Economic Development. 2012. Statistical
Abstracts. Uganda Bureau of Statistics, Kampala.
World Bank. 2010. World Development Report 2011: Conflict, Security, and Develop-
ment. Washington, DC: World Bank. http://siteresources.worldbank.org
/INTWDRS/Resources/WDR2011_Full_Text.pdf.
World Bank. 2011a. World Development Indicators 2011. Washington, DC:
World Bank. CD-ROM.
World Bank. 2011b. World Development Report 2012: Gender Equality and
­Development. Washington, DC: World Bank. doi:10.1596/978-0-8213-8810-5.
World Bank. 2018. “Productivity.” Background paper, From Uneven Growth to
Inclusive Development: Romania’s Path to Shared Prosperity, World Bank,
Washington, DC.
Xinhua News Agency. 2015. “Beijing Digs Deep in Quest for Green Energy.” China
Daily, July 21, 2015.

72 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


17. I N D E X E S

17.1 Further reference. For additional information, refer to the formal publishing
program’s General Composition and Page Makeup Guidelines document,
which is provided to typesetters, and Chicago chapter 16.

17.2 What to index. Text, substantive notes (refer to Chicago 16.110–116), text
boxes (indicated with an italic b), figures (indicated with an italic f), tables
(indicated with an italic t), and appendixes should be indexed.

Front matter is indexed on a case-by-case basis, depending on what it


contains.

Separate page numbers should be provided for the text discussion and for any
graphical representation. For example, “18, 18f, 18t” would indicate that the
topic appears in the text on page 18, in a figure on page 18, and in a table on
page 18.

A note such as the following should be placed at the top of the index: “Note: b
indicates boxes, f indicates figures, and t indicates tables.”

17.3 Capitalization. The first word of a main heading is lowercased unless the word
is capitalized in the text.

17.4 Inclusive numbers. Follow the preference of Chicago (refer to Chicago 16.14).

17.5 Cross-references. Refer to Chicago 16.15–23 for information about see


references, see also references, and generic references.

Abbreviations should have cross-references to their spelled-out forms unless


the reader is likely to find the abbreviation and the spelled-out form within a
few entries of each other. A cross-reference should not be used when there is
only one page locator.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 73


Examples

CEDAW. See Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Discrimination


against Women

Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Discrimination against


Women (CEDAW)
Afghanistan judicial reforms and, 81b
Southeastern Europe, ratification by countries in, 82b

ILO (International Labour Organization), 107

International Labour Organization (ILO), 107

United Nations Transitional Authority in Cambodia (UNCTAC), 85t

17.6 Style. The index should be set in indented style with runover lines set as 3-em
hanging indents.

Subentries indent 1 em from main entries, and sub-subentries indent 1 em from


subentries.

17.7 Alphabetization. Letter-by-letter alphabetization should be used.

17.8 Numbers. Numbers other than page citations (dates, for example) should be
placed in parentheses.

74 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


A P P E N D I X A . 1  
EDITORIAL CHECKLISTS FOR
LEVELS OF EDITING (A, B, C)

DEVELOPMENTAL EDITING CHECKLIST (LEVEL A)

The following is a list of potential developmental editing (level A) tasks. These tasks
affect the manuscript’s form, structure, and content. They occur prior to a manu-
script edit. The client will indicate which of these tasks are to be performed, if any,
and this information will be provided to the developmental editor. Developmental
edits proceed at roughly two manuscript pages an hour. (A manuscript page is
approximately 250 words.)

• Create the manuscript outline.

• Draft the manuscript from the author-approved outline.

• Assemble the manuscript from various materials supplied by the author.

• Revise the manuscript to address peer review comments.

• Reorganize the author-supplied text, as needed, to improve its structure and


to sharpen its argument.

• Rewrite the text to sharpen its argument, set the right tone, and achieve the desired
manuscript length (that is, the length appropriate for the intended readers).

• Write material to make connections among ideas explicit and to explain or


illustrate complex concepts.

• Suggest additional material (such as boxes, figures, a glossary, an index, or


tables) that would make the book more reader-friendly and valuable.

• Provide such material.


• Delete material that is tangential and of little value to the majority of the book’s
intended readers, that goes into detail greater than required for the readers’
understanding of the author’s point, or that interrupts an otherwise logical flow
of ideas.

• Reorganize and revise boxes, figures, maps, tables, and other material, as appro-
priate, to convey the author’s message effectively.

SUBSTANTIVE EDITING CHECKLIST (LEVEL B)

The following is a list of potential substantive editing (level B) tasks. The client will
indicate which of these tasks are to be performed, if any, and the production editor will
provide this information to the manuscript editor. Additionally, the manuscript editor
will perform all mechanical editing tasks (refer to the mechanical editing checklist that
follows). Substantive editing proceeds at roughly three to four manuscript pages an
hour. (See Chicago 2.48 and 2.50–51 for more information about substantive editing.)

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 75


Readability
• Point out and suggest solutions for factual inconsistencies, faulty logic,
particularly awkward or unclear passages, and incomplete comparisons.
• Cut or edit redundant passages, and simplify long, complicated sentences.
• Smooth transitions between paragraphs or sections.
• Simplify technical language, eliminate jargon, and propose or introduce definitions.
• Ensure that the style is consistent in multiauthor works.
• Make revisions in response to peer-review comments relating to the readability
of the manuscript given the intended audience.
• Break up long sequences of modifiers before nouns.
• Replace passive constructions with active verbs, when appropriate.
• Eliminate excess words that do not advance the argument.

Overall Consistency
• Suggest text to eliminate stacked heads.

Lists
• Eliminate unnecessary use of letters or numerals in run-in lists.
• Attempt to run short displayed lists into the text.

Figures and Tables


• Edit tables and figures so that they illustrate their point and present similar data
consistently.
• Eliminate text that does nothing more than repeat the data in tables or figures.
• Examine complicated tables to see if they can be simplified. If possible, edit
broadside (landscape) tables so that they can be converted into vertical (portrait)
tables.

MECHANICAL EDITING CHECKLIST (LEVEL C)

The following is a list of mechanical editing (level C) tasks. Mechanical editing


proceeds at roughly five to six manuscript pages an hour. (See Chicago 2.49 for
more information about mechanical editing.)

General Tasks
• Ensure that the manuscript is set up as individual files for the front matter,
chapters, appendixes, and any other back matter.
• Ensure that each chapter has its own notes and references that follow the end of
the text. Do not use a single alphabetical reference list as the back matter.
• Maintain a style sheet. Provide the current version of the style sheet with each
batch of the edited manuscript (when working on a flow basis) or when editing is
complete.

76 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


• Insert author queries into the text using bold and double brackets (for example,
[[AQ: Please clarify the sentence.]]) Do not use the comments or footnotes
function.
• Label heading levels using Microsoft Word formatting guidance.
• Keep the figures in place in the text. Insert callouts for correct figure placement
in the text file (for example, <<Place figure 2.1 about here.>>). Keep the figure
titles, numbers, notes, and sources in the text.
• Insert callouts in the text file for any equations, figures, maps, photographs, or
tables that are being provided to the typesetter in separate files.

Readability
• Point out factual inconsistencies, faulty logic, particularly awkward or unclear
passages, incomplete comparisons, and vague time references (in 2019 is better
than last year).
• Point out first- and second-person pronouns when it is not clear to whom they
are referring or when they seem inappropriate in the context of the rest of the
manuscript.
• Point out demonstrative pronouns (this, that, these, those) when the antecedent
is unclear.
• Fix dangling participles, subject-verb disagreement, incorrect preposition
choices, infinitives incorrectly used in place of prepositional phrases,
and other lapses.

Overall Consistency
• Follow World Bank conventions for country and economy names; alphabetize
country and economy names listed in figures, tables, and text unless there is a
clear reason to order them differently.
• Make punctuation, capitalization, spelling, and so on consistent, correct, and in
accordance with The Chicago Manual of Style, 17th edition, and the World Bank
Group Publications Editorial Style Guide.
• Edit chapter titles and subheads to be informative, to facilitate e
­ lectronic
searches, to have parallel construction, and to be consistent in style.
• Query inconsistencies in the spelling and diacritics of proper names and
foreign words.
• Spell out each abbreviation at first mention within each chapter and within each
box and graphic, even if it only occurs once.
• Highlight cross-references to other parts of the book. Cross-references are the
author’s responsibility to check.
• Delete all paragraph numbers.
• Edit endnotes to conform to The Chicago Manual of Style, 17th edition.

• Insert the instruction to the typesetter to convert footnotes to endnotes at the


end of each chapter preceding the references.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 77


Annexes and Appendixes
• Use “annex” for additional material that is placed at the end of, and is pertinent
to, a specific chapter; use “appendix” for material that is placed at the end of,
and is pertinent to, the entire book.
• Check the text for the correct use of “annex” and “appendix.”
• Annexes should be numbered by chapter; for example, the first annex to the
text of chapter 5 would be “annex 5A.” The second annex to chapter 5 would
be “annex 5B.”
• Appendixes should be lettered, not numbered. For example, the first appendix
would be “appendix A,” the second appendix would be “appendix B,” and so
forth. Subparts of the respective appendixes would be, for example, “appendix
A.1” or “appendix B.2.”

Boxes
• Ensure that boxes are correctly numbered and appear in sequential order.
• Ensure that all boxes are referred to by number in the text. The text callout
should be lowercase.
• Convert any numbered notes in boxes to lowercase letters, and place footnote
text at the base of boxes. These notes should not be part of the chapter
endnote sequence.
• Ensure that figures and tables inside boxes are numbered and titled. In the box,
number the figures and tables according to the following example: Figure
B2.1.1, in which “B” indicates that the figure is in a box, “2.1” identifies the box
number (it is the first box in chapter 2), and “.1” indicates that this figure is the
first in box 2.1.
• Treat abbreviations in boxes independently of abbreviations in the text; spell the
terms out at first occurrence in the box, and use the abbreviations in subsequent
mentions.
• Use box tagging (<Start of box>) and (<End of box>).

Figures and Tables


• Keep the figures in place in the text, and insert typesetter instructions directly
below each figure in the Word file; do not set up a separate figures file by
chapter.
• Ensure that figures and tables have titles, are correctly numbered, and appear in
sequential order.
• Ensure that every part of a figure, such as a panel, is identified by a letter and a
text title.
Note that figures and tables in text boxes are numbered and titled; see “Boxes”
above for treatment.
• Point out inconsistencies between the data in figures and tables and the
statements in text.
• Ensure that all figures and tables are discussed by number in the text. If any
figures or tables seem superfluous to the text discussion, query the author about
deleting them or moving them into an annex or appendix.

78 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


• Edit titles for sense, parallel construction, and consistent style. Make sure the
titles inform about their content using the order of “What,” “Where,” and
“When.”
• Axis titles, legends, and labels: Ensure that axis titles, legends, and labels are
present in all figures with axes. Ensure that axis titles and axis labels use
­sentence-style capitalization.
• Empty cells in tables: Ensure that every cell in a table has content; insert queries
where any cells are empty. If cells have a dash, insert an author query to define
the dash, asking whether it stands for “not available” or “not applicable.”
(For example, “[[AQ: What do empty cells indicate? Not available? Not
­applicable?]]” or “[[AQ: Does a dash indicate ‘not available’ or ‘not
­applicable’?]]”). If a dash is used to indicate “not applicable,” change it to
“n.a.” Query if meaning is unclear. Unit indicators: Figures: Ensure that unit
indicators are present in every figure that does not use axes. Tables: Ensure that
unit indicators only appear above tables when they apply to the entire table.
• In each figure or table that includes nonstandard abbreviations and symbols,
define the abbreviations in a general note to the figure or table. Do so even if
the abbreviations have been spelled out previously in the text.
• Provide sources for all figures, maps, and tables. Request source information when
such information is missing. If authors have used data to create original figures,
they should indicate the sources of the data in the source lines. If the authors have
created original figures that do not use data, list “World Bank” as the source.
“Original calculations for this publication” and “Original figure for this publication”
are acceptable alternatives in such cases. Use the author-date style for figure
sources to refer readers to a publication. Make sure that the full bibliographic
information is included in the reference list at the end of the chapter.
• Note: Spell out all abbreviations in tables and figures in the Note section, even if
previously spelled out in the text. Use the singular for “Note” even if more than
one element is used.
• In figure- and table-related text (in the note or body text), flag instances in which
any figure or note content is referred to by its color. This is important; mentions
of color will need to be updated if the typeset content uses different colors from
the manuscript, which often ends up being the case.

Maps

1. Ensure that every map has a number and text title, is styled and numbered
separately from figures, uses the same two-digit numbering convention as
figures and tables, has a corresponding text callout, and appears sequentially.

2. Check that each panel in a map with multiple panels has its own letter and text
title.

3. Query if no source is listed; the source should be in addition to the IBRD number
and date slug that appears inside World Bank maps. (In addition to that slug, if a
departmental logo and disclaimer paragraph appear in World Bank maps, add
a query to indicate that those should be deleted.) For non-World Bank maps,
a source line as well as a permission line must appear below the figure.

Mathematics
• Apply two-digit numbering if an equation is set on its own line, for
­example,“1.3” for the third equation in chapter 1.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 79


• Ensure that equation numbering is sequential.
• Ensure that all notation and typographical distinctions are consistent throughout.
• Clearly identify any potentially ambiguous characters.

Photographs
• Ensure that every photograph has a number and title, is styled and numbered
separately from the figures, uses the same two-digit numbering system as
figures and tables, has a corresponding text callout, and appears sequentially.
• Insert a query if a photograph is missing a source line and “further permission
required” notice (for example, “[[AQ: Please indicate the source [photogra-
pher/copyright holder] of this photo.]]”).

Source Documentation
• Check source citations against the reference list or bibliography; query the
author for any missing references or for inconsistencies between a text citation
and its bibliographic entry.
• Edit the bibliography or reference list for reasonable conformity to The Chicago
Manual of Style, 17th edition, and the World Bank Group Publications Editorial
Style Guide. Query incomplete or missing entries.
• Spot check URLs to ensure they are accurate.
• Flag any portions of the manuscript which the author must seek permission from
the original publisher to reprint. Refer to section 4 of the World Bank Group
Publications Editorial Style Guide.

Lists
• Ensure consistency in the handling of lists with respect to such items as punctua-
tion, capitalization, and numbering versus lettering.
• Use initial capitalization for the first word of each bullet.
• Use numbers instead of bullets to indicate sequences.

File Preparation
• Delete extraneous material.
• Finalize the table of contents, not including page numbers.
• Ensure that the manuscript is complete, with individual files for the front matter,
chapters, and back matter and with data files by chapter folder for all figures.

80 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


APPENDIX A.2a SAMPLE STYLE SHEET (BLANK)
[Note: Copyeditors may prefer to create a style sheet in which word usage appears in alphabetical order
(see appendix A.2b of this guide); the abbreviation list should be a separate alphabetical file.]

ABBREVIATIONS EXAMPLES

BOLD, ITALICS, AND UNDERLINE

BOXES, FIGURES, AND TABLES

CAPITALIZATION

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 81


HYPHENATION

NUMBERS

PUNCTUATION

MISCELLANEOUS

SPELLING AND USAGE

82 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


APPENDIX A.2b SAMPLE STYLE SHEET (ACTUAL)

(adj = adjective, n = noun, um = unit modifier, v = verb)

A K self-financing
adviser know-how (n) semiskilled
socioeconomic
B L start up (v)
best-practice (um) landholder (n, um) start-up (adj, n)
better-informed (um) landholding (n, um)
landowner T
C land ownership time frame (n)
climate change (n, um) land use (n, um) tradable
coexist large-scale (um) trade-off
community-level (um) long-held (um)
constitution low-income (um) U
cost-effective underreporting
country-specific (um) M underused
cross-country (um) medium-size (adj) under way
cut-off (um) microbusiness United States (n)
middle-income (um) US (adj)
D mid-level
data set (n) much-needed (um) V
decision-maker (n) value added tax
decision-making (um) N
nondocumentary W
E website (n)
e.g. (change to for example) O well-designed (um)
email overreport (v)
etc. (change to and so on) X
P x-axis
F pasture user association Xerox
first-time (um) policy maker (n) x-ray (v)
follow-up (n, um) postwar X-ray (n)
forestland precoded
private sector (n, um) Y
G pro-poor y-axis
gender-sensitive (um) public sector (n, um) year-on-year (adj)
good-practice (um)
Z
H Q zero-sum (adj)
health care (adj, n) quasi-professional
high-profile (um)
R
I risk taker (n)
i.e. (change to that is) risk taking (n)
ill-defined (um) risk-taking (adj)

J S
joint venture (n) school-age (adj)
judgment secondhand

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 83


Headings: A-level and b-level headings are freestanding References: Use current World Bank style as follows:
with headline-style caps. C-level headings are freestand-
Book: Moore, Mark. 2015. Creating Public Value.
ing with sentence-style caps.
­ ambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
C
In-text lists: (a), (b), (c), not (1), (2), (3) Chapter in a book: Rezende, Fernando, and José Roberto
Afonso. 2018. “The Brazilian Federation: Facts, Challenges,
Terms and words used as words: Italicize. and Prospects.” In Federalism and Economic Reform:
International Perspectives, edited by Jessica Wallack and
Numbers: Spell out one through nine; use figures for 10 T. N. Srinivasan, 143–88. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge
and up. Use figures for physical quantities and percent- University Press.
ages. Use comma for thousands: 4,000.
Journal article: Alok, V. N. 2015. “State Finance Commis-
Author-date citations: Follow World Bank style. Thus, sions in Indian: An Assessment.” Indian Journal of Public
author-date citations without an accompanying discussion Administration 61 (3): 716–32.
should be included in text, not in the notes. Single author: Conference paper: Alok, V. N., and Laveesh Bhandari.
(Smith 2019); Smith (2019). Two authors: (Smith and Jones 2012. “Rating the Policy and Functional Environment of
2019); Smith and Jones (2019). Three authors: (Smith, PRIs in Different States of India: A Concept Paper.” Paper
Jones, and Brown 2017); Smith, Jones, and Brown (2017). presented at the Fifth Roundtable of Ministers in Charge of
Four or more authors: (Smith and others 2000); Smith and Panchayati Raj, Srinagar, India, October 28–29.
others (2000). Use first initial (or, if necessary, first and
middle initials or full first name) to differentiate authors Working paper: Jin, Hehui, Yingyi Qian, and Barry R.
with the same name: (K. Smith 2019; R. Smith 2019). Weingast. 2016. “Regional Decentralization and Fiscal
When there are several parenthetical citations, alphabet- Incentives: Federalism, Chinese Style.” Working Paper
ize them and separate them with a semicolon: (Adams SWP-99-013, Stanford University, Stanford, CA.
2012; Bayer 2013, 2018; Crawford 2017; Johnson and
others 2018; K. Smith 2012, 2013).

Quotations: Quotations must include a page number in


author-date citation. Style is (Smith 2019, 23) or Smith
(2019, 23)

84 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


A P P E N D I X A . 3  
MICROSOFT W O R D F O R M AT T I N G
INSTRUCTIONS
Content reaches users in various ways, many of them electronic and mobile. The publishing
unit’s job is to process and format the content to make sure this happens quickly and
seamlessly. We ask that you take 10 minutes to learn to apply styles to just a few elements in
your document. The few additional mouse clicks on your part will considerably accelerate
content processing by us and our vendors.

HOW TO APPLY STYLES TO YOUR DOCUMENT

Note that the process described below can take place as you write (starting with the very first
word you type), in the middle of the writing process, or after you’re done writing. These steps
assume you are already done with the writing process [or if you are a copyeditor, they assume
the author is done], but they can easily be applied to other situations.

1. Open your Word document. Your content usually has a title, headings, figures and tables,
and, of course, paragraphs of regular text. We would like you to apply styles to just a few
items. The bulk of your document, regular text, does NOT need to be styled.

2. Open the Styles pane and keep it open while you work.

With the Home tab of the Microsoft Office ribbon selected, click on the “maximizing”
arrow in the bottom right corner of the Styles ribbon (Windows) or the Styles Pane button
on the right edge of the ribbon (Mac).

Windows

Mac

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 85


This will open a Styles pane, which will look like the image below (left).

Windows users: In the Styles pane, click on “Options,” which will open a dialog
window, shown below (right). In the dialog window, below “Select styles to
show:”, choose “All styles.” Click OK.

Windows

Mac users: Near the bottom of the Styles pane, beside “ List,” select “All styles.”

Mac

86 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


3. Check that you are in Draft view. Working in Draft view will allow you to view
the styles already applied to your document and the new styles that you will
apply to it. To work in Draft view, select “Draft” on the “View” ribbon.

Windows

Mac

You should now see the style area pane on the left-hand side of your screen. If you do
not, see page 88 of this guide.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 87


If you do not see the style area pane on the left-hand side of your screen, you
may need to adjust your Word options. To do this in Windows, click on the file
tab of the Microsoft Office ribbon, then in the toolbar at the left of the screen,
click “Options”. When the Options window opens, click “Advanced” in the
toolbar to the left of the screen, then scroll down to the field labeled “Style
area pane width in Draft and Outline views:”. In that field, enter “1.”

In Mac OS, click Word > Preferences in the menu at the top of the screen, then
click the “View” button. In the field labeled “ Style area width:”, enter “1.”

Do not worry if your figures “disappear in this view”; that is normal. When you

! would like to view and work with any figures in your document, simply revert to
Print Layout view. You’ll still see the Styles pane on the right.

88 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


4. With the style area pane visible on the left and the Styles pane on the right,
apply styles as you work through your document.

Here are the items to watch out for in your document and the styles that should
be applied to them:

ITEM IN YOUR DOCUMENT STYLE TO APPLY NOTES

Title (of your book, chapter, or paper) Title

Subtitle (of your book, chapter, or paper) Subtitle

Abstract (of your book or chapter) Message Header

Section headings Heading 1 to 5 Please apply the appropriate styles to the headings,
Heading 1 being the highest level (in other words, the
first section level in a document, such as Introduction
or Conclusion). All subsections below this level begin
with lower-level headings (such as H2 and below).

Block quotes Block Text

In your document, highlight the item to style and then click the desired style in
the Styles pane on the right of your screen. Some styles will change your text
color to blue, but do not worry. This change has no bearing on the final
product. If it bothers you, feel free to change the text color to black manually.

After applying the style, you will see that the style is now indicated in the style
area pane on the left of your screen, next to the item that you just highlighted
and styled.

Applying the above-listed styles to these key elements will ensure that the
publishing unit will interpret the structure of your document correctly.

Sample text showing all the styles listed above:

The Title of My Chapter


Subtitle

This is the abstract that I am providing with my chapter. It should be about


100 words long. Providing this abstract makes my content more discoverable
in online repositories.

This Is a Level 1 Heading


This is regular text, so it doesn’t need a style.

Level 2 Heading
More regular text.

A block quote is a long excerpt from another source. Here I’ll pretend that I’m
quoting from Jane Austen. Her writings are no longer protected by copyright, so
I do not need to secure permission. Normally, a quote of about four lines (or
longer) would require permission. Anything less than that is considered “fair
use” by most copyright experts.

Regular text continues, with no style applied.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 89


A P P E N D I X A . 4  
DOCUMENT
CLEANUP INSTRUCTIONS
FOR COPYEDITORS
Copyeditors should start with the redlined document, work with tracking off, and
end with a clean document.

WHAT IS CLEANUP, AND WHY IS IT NEEDED?

Cleanup is the production task that takes place after author review of an edited manuscript.
It transforms the author-reviewed file into a clean, tagged version that is ready for typesetting.
Tracked changes have to be dealt with and cleaned up, and tags have to be put in place to
convey to the typesetter the heading hierarchy and the placement of boxes, figures, and tables.

1. First, the Basics


A clean document is one that has no redlining. Eliminating redlining is not the same as hiding
it. When you send a clean document to the production editor, no redlining should be visible
when the review mode is set to “All Markup” or, in older versions, “Final ­Showing Markup.”

Mac Windows

2. What you need to do

• Here is a document reviewed and sent back by the author:

• Turn tracking off; it will only get in the way at this point.

90 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


• Turn tracking off; it will only get in the way at this point.

••• Highlight
Turn the fragment
Highlight theoff;
tracking it or
willsentence
fragment or get that
sentence
only has
that
in the redlining:
has
way redlining:
at this point.

• Highlight the fragment or sentence that has redlining:

• Accept the change (Word 2007 will move you to the next redlined fragment automatically; you
should choose the dropdown option to accept and stay put) and see how the fragment looks:
• Accept the change (Word 2016 will move you to the next redlined fragment
• Accept the change (Word 2007 will move you to the next redlined fragment automatically; you
automatically; youthe
should choose should choose
dropdown the dropdown
option option
to accept and to “Accept
stay put) and see This
how the fragment looks:
Change” in order to stay put) and see how the fragment looks:

Editorial Style
90 Guide 2015

•• It does notnot
It does look good.
look good.Delete
DeletetheEditorial
the extra Style
extra space
space andGuide
and 2015
closing
closing parenthesis;
parenthesis; unbold
unbold the the period:
period:

• Now it looks good. Move on to the next redline you see. Repeat until you are done.
• Now it looks good. Move on to the next redline you see. Repeat until you are
3. What
done.if the document comes back from the author with some queries still in it?
We like our documents to be query-free when we send them to the typesetter.
3. _What if the document comes back from the author with some queries still in it?
• Reevaluate queries that have been ignored with this in mind.
We like our documents to be query-free when we send them to the typesetter.
• Depending on how the author has responded to other queries, you may be able to eliminate others.
• Reevaluate queries that have been ignored with this in mind.
• Consider whether the query was important to begin with and whether it can be deleted.
• Depending on how the author has responded to other queries, you may be able
• Leave only queries that you consider critical; delete the rest.
to eliminate some queries.
• And remember, we don’t want to see redlining showing those deletions.
• Consider whether the query was important to begin with and whether it can be
deleted.
4. What if you must retain some queries for page proofs?
• Leave only queries that you consider critical; delete the rest.
OK, so you’ve decided that a few queries are important. These will be moved to the margins of the proof
by
• the
Andtypesetter,
remember,and we
in most cases
do not there
want to will
see not be an arrow
redlining pointing
showing thosetodeletions.
the location.

Therefore you must reword remaining queries so that they make sense when set in the margin:
4. What if you must retain some queries for page proofs?
This works in Word:
OK,recession
The so you have decided that
of 1992–2002 was… a few queries are important. These queries will be
moved to the margins of the proof by the typesetter, and in most cases there will not
Itbe an not
does arrow pointing
work to the
at all when location
it sits tothe
next to which they apply.
paragraph; the typesetter may not even place it next to the
right one. Reword it:
Therefore,
[[AU: Pleaseyou must
check thereword
dates ofremaining queries
the recession; so that they
1992–2002 make
can’t sense
possibly bewhen set in
accurate]]
the margin:
If any queries remain unresolved, move them from the text to Comments so the production editor
and The following
typesetter canquery works
see them in Word:
easily.
The recession of 1992–2002 [[AQ: Please confirm years.]] was . . .

It does not work at all when it sits next to the paragraph; the typesetter may not
5. What
even else?
place it next to the right paragraph. Reword it:
• Some authors respond to edits by using the Comments feature in Word. Review the contents of
[[AQ: Please check the dates of the recession; 1992–2002 can’t possibly be accurate.]]
these comment balloons, deal with the feedback, and delete the balloons.
•If any queries remain
Add heading unresolved,
styles move
to the headings them
if you from the
skipped textduring
this task to Comments
the editingsophase.
the
production editor and typesetter can see them easily.
Add placeholders for figures and tables if they’re in separate files or if even if they are in the
main file <<Insert figure 2.1 about here>>
• Insert <<text box>> and <<end text box>> tags for text boxes.
• BankBefore
World Groupyou send the Editorial
Publications “clean” file toGuide
Style the EXTOP
| 2020production editor, go through it to make sure 91
there’s no redlining. A clean document is one that has no redlining.
5. What else?

• Some authors respond to edits using the Comments feature in Word. Review
the contents of these comment balloons, deal with the feedback, and delete
the balloons.

• Add heading styles to the headings if you skipped this task during the editing
phase. For instructions on how to do this, see Appendix A.3 of this guide.

Add placeholders for figures and tables if they are in separate files or even if
they are in the main file. <<Insert figure 2.1 about here>>
• Insert <<text box>> and <<end text box>> tags for text boxes.

• Before you send the “clean” file to the production editor, go through
it to make sure there is no redlining. A clean document is one that has no
redlining.

92 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


A P P E N D I X A . 5  
F R E Q U E N T LYOVERLOOKED
STYLE RULES FOR EDITORS
AND PROOFREADERS

FOR EDITORS:

• Accept all tracked changes before working on the document.

• In each chapter, spell out each acronym and abbreviation at first occurrence,
followed by the abbreviation in parentheses, even if it is used only once.

FOR EDITORS AND PROOFREADERS:


• Ensure that all country, territory, economy, and city names are used
correctly (consult appendix C in this guide regarding correct use in tables
and figures and subsequent uses in text):

Examples
Côte d’Ivoire (never “Ivory Coast”; note circumflex)
Bolivia, Plurinational State of (in titles)
Colombia (not “Columbia”)
Democratic Republic of Congo (not “Democratic Republic of the Congo”)
“Eswatini” rather than “Swaziland”
Gambia, The
Hong Kong SAR, China (no parentheses around “China”; never refer to it as a
“country”—“economy” is acceptable)
Iran, Islamic Republic of
Korea, Democratic People’s Republic of (never “North Korea”)
Korea, Republic of (never “South Korea”)
Kyrgyz Republic (not “Kyrgyzstan”)
Lao People’s Democratic Republic (never “Laos”)
Macao SAR, China (no parentheses around “China”; never refer to it as a
“country”—“economy” is acceptable)
Macedonia, former Yugoslav Republic of, is now “North Macedonia”
Mumbai (do not use “Bombay”)
Myanmar (never “Burma,” except in historical contexts)
Russian Federation (not “Russia Federation”)
São Tomé and Príncipe (no short form; note diacritical marks)
South Sudan (not “Republic of South Sudan”)
Taiwan, China (never refer to it as a “country”—“economy” is acceptable)
United States (use US as an adjective or a noun)
Venezuela, República Bolivariana de (yes, you need all the words!)
West Bank and Gaza (refer to it as an “economy,” not a “country”; never refer
to it as “Palestinian Territory/ies”)

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 93


• Policy maker (two words)

• Indexes and appendixes (not indices and appendices); use letters to designate
appendixes to the whole book.

• Serial comma

• Link (not linkage)

• Use an en dash (not a hyphen) for page and date ranges

• Date ranges: 1982–83, 1982–2002 (not 1982–3, 1982–02)

• Use the en dash correctly in compounds: World Bank–supported (not “World


Bank-supported”)

• Make sure each figure, map, photograph, and table has a source; query if a
source is missing.

• Ensure that box, figure, map, and table notes are not part of the overall footnote
scheme; ensure that the markers are letters, not numbers.

• Ensure that no country maps of India have been included, other than as part
of the region or world (see section 13.25 of this guide for more information).

94 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


A P P E N D I X A . 6  
A U T H O R ’ S
CHECKLIST FOR FORMAL
PUBLISHING
This document was developed for use by authors, but it will also be helpful to
copyeditors who perform some of these tasks.

It is our goal to provide you with a publishing process that is as efficient, cost-
effective, and quality assured as possible. You are an essential partner in this process.
As you prepare to submit your manuscript to us, please ensure the following:

(1) It is complete, containing all elements of the front matter, main text, and back
matter.

(2) It meets all of the submission requirements specified in this checklist.

This checklist summarizes the minimum mandatory requirements for submission


to the automated publication workflow.

STEP 1: Get permissions and clearances and keep them for your records;
provide a copy to the publishing unit.

o O
 btain clearances from the World Bank’s Cartography Unit for any maps in the
manuscript; provide a copy to the Formal Publishing Program. Send map
requests to the Cartography Unit at [email protected]; copy Bruno
Bonansea, [email protected] (202-458-9329). For clearance of existing
maps, use the following email address: [email protected].

o A
 ssess whether permissions are needed (refer to the Formal Publishing Program’s
guidelines) to reprint any material from non-Bank sources, including text as well as
graphical elements such as maps, figures, tables, and photographs. Secure written
permission for text and graphics, excluding photographs, where necessary; refer
to our sample Request for Permissions letter. A separate sample letter specifically
for permission to use photographs is available from the same guidelines page.

o S
 ecure copyright releases from contributing non-Bank authors (see our sample
copyright assignment form for books).

STEP 2: Finalize your manuscript

o P
 rovide sources for figures, maps, and tables. If authors have used World Bank
data to create original figures or tables, they should indicate the sources of the
data in the source lines. If the authors have used non–World Bank sources, they
should specify them in the source line and obtain permissions as needed (see
Step 1). If the authors have created original figures or tables that
do not use data, such as flowcharts, list “World Bank” as the source line.

o Check that all boxes, figures, maps, and tables are mentioned in the text.

o C
 heck that all references are complete and accurate (containing names of
authors, titles of publications, names of publishers, dates of publication, and
other essential information).

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 95


o P
 lace notes and references at the end of each chapter, not at the back of
the book.

o D
 elete any comments in the Word files, and ensure that no tracked changes
remain in the files.

o A
 ssemble the front matter: title page; table of contents; foreword and preface
(optional); about the authors or editors (names and affiliations/bios up to
100 words, or, for edited volumes, list of contributors with affiliations);
acknowledgments; abbreviations (optional).

o A
 ssemble the chapters—chapter text, annexes (if applicable), notes, and
references—and name the files by chapter number. Examples: 00 Front Matter
.docx, 01 Ch_1 Family Obligations.docx, 09 Back Matter.docx.

o A
 ssemble the back matter, including any appendixes. Name the files by
­appendix letter.

o Assemble appropriate source files (data or art) for figures, maps, and images:
→ Excel files for dense figures (for example, scatter plots with tightly grouped
data points and line graphs with significantly overlapping data lines). Individ-
ual files should be clearly titled by chapter and figure number.
→ High-resolution files (300 dpi or greater in eps) of figures derived from Stata
or similar programs.
→ Map files (high-resolution files/300 dpi in jpg, eps, or vector).
→ Any source math or tables, if these were provided as pictures and are not
editable.

For more information, please see our Manuscript Development Resources on the
intranet. (https://worldbankgroup.sharepoint.com/sites/wbsites/WBPP/Pages​
/index.aspx).

o W
 rite an abstract of the full study (350 words). Chapter abstracts are no longer
required.

o Identify a suitable cover photo (high resolution/300 dpi), preferably with horizon-
tal or landscape orientation. If the resolution is low or the image is otherwise
unsuitable for publication for technical reasons, the Formal Publishing Program
can conduct photo research for an additional fee.

Note: The World Bank Photo Library has images available at no cost. Searching the
Photo Library can be a slow process; for a faster option, go to http://www.flickr
.com/photos/worldbank.

STEP 3: Submit the following to the Formal Publishing Program (once you have
the full package in print and in electronic format) in OneDrive or via email:

o Authorization Form completed and signed

o Marketing and Metadata Questionnaire completed and signed

o Decision Memo signed

o O
 ne aggregate Word file of the entire manuscript, for cataloging by the Library
of Congress

o M
 anuscript disaggregated into separate Word files and clearly titled by front
matter, chapter number, and back matter.

96 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


o Biographical sketches of authors

o Abstract of the full study

o Excel files clearly titled for dense figures

o High-resolution files (eps, jpg, or vector) for maps and images

o Cover photo (high resolution/300 dpi).

For questions, please contact your acquisitions editor. Thank You!

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 97


A P P E N D I X A . 7  
MANUSCRIPT P R E PA R AT I O N G U I D E L I N E S
These guidelines are intended for use by the editors hired by the Formal Publishing
Program, as well as for those hired directly by authoring units. All copyeditors on the
Formal Publishing Program’s approved list are able to perform these tasks.

Helpful resources for authoring units are available on the World Bank’s
intranet/Formal Publishing Program at https://worldbankgroup.sharepoint​
.com/sites/wbsites/WBPP/Pages/index.aspx.

• World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide

• Microsoft Word Formatting Instructions

• Excel Figure Preparation Guidelines

• Sample Request for Permissions Letter


• Sample Copyright Assignment Form (to be provided to non-Bank authors)

• Manuscript Preparation Guidelines

A.   PARTS OF THE BOOK


World Bank books may contain any or all of the following elements in the following
order:

Front Matter
Half-title page
Series or cover information, list of prior publications, or blank
Title page
Copyright page (The Formal Publishing Program will add this page and will include
illustration and photo credits at the bottom of the page.)
Contents
Foreword (written by someone other than the author; optional)
Preface (written by the author; optional)
Acknowledgments (if not part of the preface; optional)
About the Authors/Editors or List of Contributors
Introduction, Overview, or Executive Summary (We recommend that these elements
appear in the main text rather than in the front matter.)
Abbreviations

Text
Introduction, overview, executive summary, or chapter 1
Subsequent chapters with their respective annexes, notes, and references
Note: Include any text for part openers, if applicable.

Back Matter
Appendixes (optional)

98 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


B.   DRAFTING THE MANUSCRIPT

1. Collect all materials for your manuscript, including boxes, figures, maps, math,
tables, and references.

2. Consider clarity and electronic searchability when writing chapter titles; section
headings; figure, map, and table titles; and appendix titles.
• Ensure that readers have sufficient information to make sense of these
elements if they are viewed apart from the book or chapter: for example,
“Results of Regression Analysis” will not adequately inform prospective
readers of the contents of a table or appendix.
• Use descriptive titles that cover What + Where + When. Doing so will ensure
that important details like main topics, keywords, country or region names,
and years of relevance (where appropriate) are featured in the title and catch
readers’ attention.

3. Provide shorter paragraphs and more subheads for improved readability of


e-books.

4. Place notes and references at the end of each chapter, following the chapter text
and any chapter annexes, so that each chapter is as self-contained as possible.

C. C
 HECKLIST FOR PREPARING THE MANUSCRIPT FOR SUBMISSION
TO THE FORMAL PUBLISHING PROGRAM

1. Ensure that all Comments in the draft and reviewed Word files have been
addressed, and delete any remaining Comments so that the files are clean.

2. Review all tracked changes and “accept” them or revise the text as necessary so
that the files are clean.

3. Consider using the Microsoft Word Formatting Instructions and the Excel Figure
Formatting Guidelines provided by the Formal Publishing Program to facilitate
the processing of the manuscript content.

4. Ensure that the manuscript is complete:


• Front matter, including the title page, table of contents, foreword, preface,
acknowledgments, and author/editor biographical information (not all of
these elements are necessarily included in the front matter of every book)
• Chapters, including any chapter annexes
• Back matter, such as appendixes.

5. Provide a book abstract.

6. Follow the approved World Bank Country, Economy, and Territory Names list
in appendix C of the World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide when
designating these entities. Put them in alphabetical order in the text and tables,
unless another ranking is appropriate.

7. Secure written permission for the following non–World Bank materials:


• Use of a substantial amount of copyrighted material of any kind
• Use of any tables or figures containing pictorial elements (for example,
flowcharts, art, photographs, or maps)
• Use of any art, photographs, or maps.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 99


Written permission is generally not required for the following elements:
The doctrine of fair use allows authors to quote from other authors’ work or to
reproduce small amounts of graphic material based on data, excluding pictorial
elements, for purposes of review or criticism or to illustrate or buttress their own
points. Authors who follow fair use should ensure that they accurately transcribe
any material, give credit to their sources, and do not quote out of context.
­Additional information is provided on the Formal Publishing Program’s intranet
site and in The Chicago Manual of Style, 17th edition.

D. PREPARING THE ABSTRACT

Please submit an abstract of the full manuscript (350 words). Chapter abstracts are
no longer required.

E.   CHECKING THE STRUCTURE


1. Ensure that all sections and elements listed in the table of contents are included
in the manuscript.

2. Check that all heading levels are correct, and check that all sections and
subsections of the text follow logically.

3. Check that each text reference to a box, figure, map, or table uses the correct
number of the box, figure, map, or table and that any reference to another
chapter or section uses the correct number or title. Do not include any cross-
references to pages, since the page numbers will change during layout. With
a few exceptions, do not include cross-references to section numbers, since
these will be deleted.

F.   COLLECTING AND NAMING THE FILES

Text files
File format. Provide the manuscript text in Word. To avoid delays in the editing
process, follow the Microsoft Word Formatting Instructions provided in
­appendix A.3 of this guide.
File names. Include the chapter number and title, or the appendix letter and title, in
the file name so that the text is kept in the proper order and no pieces are over-
looked.
Examples
00 Front Matter.docx
01 Ch_1 Family Obligations.docx
02 Ch_2 Health Insurance.docx
08 App_A Welfare Regimes.docx
File organization. To control file size and facilitate the editing process, use separate
files for the front matter, each chapter, each appendix, and any back matter.
Annexes for chapters and appendixes for complete books. Appendixes to individual
chapters are called annexes to avoid confusion with appendixes to the book as a
whole. The first annex to chapter 7, for example, would be titled “Annex 7A,” and
the second annex, “Annex 7B.” The first appendix to a book would be titled
“Appendix A,” and the second appendix, “Appendix B.” In addition, each annex
and appendix should have a descriptive text heading.

100 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


Boxes
File format. Provide text boxes in Word as part of the main text. Avoid using
Word text boxes; instead, type <<text box>> at the start of the material and
<<end text box>> at the end.
Graphics. Assign a number and title to every figure or table within a box.
• In a text box, number any figures and tables according to the following example:
Figure B2.1.1, in which “B” indicates that the figure is in a box, “2.1” identifies
the box number (it is the first box in chapter 2), and “.1” indicates that this figure
is the first in box 2.1. If a figure in a box comprises multiple panels and these
panels are referenced in the text, they should be referred to as “panel a”, “panel
b”, and so forth. Each panel within the figure should be given a subtitle that
includes a letter (“a,” “b,” and so forth) followed by a descriptive heading.

• In a chapter annex, number any figures or tables in a box according to the


following example: Figure B2A.1.1, in which “B” indicates that the figure is
in a box, “2A.1” identifies the box number (it is the first box in annex A of
chapter 2), and “.1” indicates that this figure is the first in box 2A.1. Figures
with multiple panels should be treated as indicated in the preceding bullet,
with a letter and a text heading.

Length. Limit the number of words in text boxes to 700 or fewer.


Notes. Use a self-contained lettering system for any notes within boxes to avoid
confusion with notes in the text. Superscript lowercase letters are used within the text
of the box. The notes section pertinent to the box is placed at the end of the box.
Quantity. Keep the quantity of boxes to a minimum so that they do not overshadow
the text itself.
Sources. In citing sources of information, specify the author’s last name and the
year of publication. Place complete bibliographic information in the reference list
for the chapter. Source lines are not required if the box is the original work of the
author.
Text references. Make sure that each box is mentioned, by number, in the text.
Titles. Keep titles informative and parallel in structure and tone.

Figures
General
• Check that every figure has a figure number, title, and source.
• Cite every figure by number in the text and ensure that every figure appears in
sequential order.
• Provide Excel or other data files whenever possible, and for all dense figures.
• For all figures with axes, indicate the unit of measurement for each axis.
• For line graphs and bar charts, use legends (figure keys) to identify each line,
bar, or bar segment.
• For pie charts and scatterplots, use labels to identify each segment or specific
data points.

Abbreviations and symbols. Define all nonstandard abbreviations and symbols used
in a figure, including as part of the title or unit indicator, in a note to the figure.
Country and economy names. Check that names follow the approved World Bank
listing provided in the World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide,
appendix C.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 101


Data. When you provide your data for your figures (in a separate folder), make sure
that the data files and individual workbook sheets have the same numbering as the
figures they represent and are clearly titled and ordered. For example:
• 01 Ch_1 Figures.xls
• 02 Ch_2 Figures.xls
• 08 App_A Figures.xls
Make sure that data workbooks are cleaned up and that no extra sheets are transmitted,
or highlight the data to be included if you do not want to remove sheets.
Notes. Ensure that all figure notes show in the text file; check the data files, and if
necessary, copy any notes from the data files into the Word files.
Numbering. Use the two-digit style. For example:
• “Figure O.1” is the first figure in an overview; “figure I.1” is the first figure in an
unnumbered introduction.
• “Figure 1.1” is the first figure in chapter 1.
• “Figure 2A.1” is the first figure in the first annex to chapter 2; “figure 2B.1” is
the first figure in the second annex to chapter 2.
• “Figure A.1” is the first figure in appendix A; “figure B.1” is the first figure in
appendix B.
Refer to the preceding “Boxes” section for information on numbering figures that
appear in boxes.
Permissions. Check that you have obtained permissions in writing where needed.
A sample letter for text and graphics, excluding photographs, and a sample letter
specifically for photographs are available on the Formal Publishing Program’s
Manuscript Development Resources intranet page.
Sources
• Use author-date style to refer readers to a publication. Make sure that the full
bibliographic information is included in the reference list at the end of each
chapter.
• The World Bank’s Legal Department has directed that a source line of “Authors”
should not be used because it can create confusion over copyright ownership.
• Sources for figures and tables are treated the same as sources for text. All figures
need to have source lines.

Examples
• If figures are original and use text and not data, for example, flowcharts, then
list “World Bank” as the source.
• If figures use World Bank data, then cite the data source as specifically as
possible, for example, “World Development Indicators Database.” In the
absence of this information, provide a note specifying “World Bank data” as the
source. Do not use “Authors” or “Author’s compilation.” It is acceptable to start
the source line with “An elaboration of…” or “based on…” or similar language.
• If figures use non–World Bank data owned by a third party, then use a
standard source line.
• If figures are (a) owned by a third party (not the World Bank) and (b) require
permission, then use the following line: “Source: [author-date citation], ©[copy-
right owner]. Reproduced with permission from [copyright owner]; further
permission required for reuse.”

102 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


• Provide complete source information in the reference list or bibliography.
• Refer to Chicago chapter 4 for more complete information about rights and
permissions, and to Chicago chapter 15 for information about documentation.

Titles. Check that every figure has a descriptive title that covers What + Where +
When.
• Be aware that the figure will be electronically searchable and might be viewed
apart from the text in an electronic iteration.
• Avoid using ellipses or dashes to connect one figure title to the next.
• If a figure is divided into parts, make sure that each subpart is lettered and has a
title (for example, “a. Texttexttext”).
• Check that the title appears in both the data file (Excel, or eps for Stata) and the
Word file.
• Avoid using the World Bank’s regional abbreviations (AFR or SSA, EAP, ECA,
LAC, MNA or MENA, and SAR).
Text references, Make sure that each figure is discussed, by number, in the text.
Unit modifier. Label each axis, and provide unit indicators. For a figure that does
not use axes, provide a unit indicator for the figure as a whole.

Maps
Creation and approval. Send requests to create maps to the World Bank’s
Cartography Unit at [email protected]; copy Bruno Bonansea,
[email protected] (202-458-9329).
• Be aware that high-resolution images are needed; as a rule, images from the
internet do not have adequate resolution and need to be re-created. Permission
may be required for non–World Bank maps.
• Cartography will provide an identifying IBRD number for each map; this number
should not be deleted from the files supplied to the Formal Publishing Program.
• If the maps have been created by another source, then secure the Cartography
Unit’s clearance. All maps must be approved by the Cartography Unit before
delivery to the Formal Publishing Program.
File format. Provide maps as separate Illustrator/eps files as well as low-resolution
PDFs. Note that maps provided as screen shots will need to be re-created.
File organization and naming. Place any maps in a separate Maps folder with
subfolders by chapter. Identify each map by number both in the file name and in
the document.
Examples
Map 1_1.eps
Map 1_2.eps
Map 2_1.eps
Map 2_2.eps
Map A_1.eps
Numbering convention. Label and number maps separately from figures, and use
the same two-digit numbering convention for them as for figures and tables.
Permissions. Secure permission from the originator to use maps taken from
copyrighted sources.
Sources. Check that every map has a source line.
Text callouts. Ensure that every map has a corresponding text callout.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 103


Math
File format. Show mathematical equations in the Word text files of the manuscript,
or provide them as PDFs in separate files, to ensure accuracy as the files are
processed.
File organization. If the math is provided in a separate Math folder from the
manuscript, include a picture of the math in the manuscript file for reference.
File names. If a file contains multiple equations, include the chapter number or
appendix letter in the file name and label each equation by number within the
document.
Examples
01 Ch_1 Math.docx
02 Ch_2 Math.docx
08 App_A Math.docx
If each file consists of only one equation, identify the equation by number in the file
name and in the document.
Examples
Equation 1_1.xlsx
Equation 1_2.xlsx
Equation 2_1.xlsx
Equation A_1.xlsx

References
Cited works. Delete any entries not actually cited from the reference list.
Completeness. Check that all references are complete and accurate, with each
author’s name, the title of the publication, the name of the publisher, the date of
publication, and other essential information included.
Organization by chapter. Ensure that all references have been organized by chapter
and are appended to the end of each chapter.

Tables
Abbreviations and symbols. All nonstandard abbreviations and symbols that are
used in a table, including as part of the title or unit indicator, need to be defined in
a note to the table.
Blank cells. Avoid leaving blank cells within a table. Instead, use one of the symbols
below.
— Not available
n.a. Not applicable
.. Negligible
0 Zero
Column headings. Provide a heading for every table column.
Editability. Make sure that the tables in the manuscript files are provided in editable
formats rather than as pictures.
Numbering. Use the two-digit style. For example:
• “Table O.1” is the first table in an overview; “table I.1” is the first table in an
unnumbered introduction.

• “Table 1.1” is the first table in chapter 1; “table 2A.1” is the first table in the
first annex to chapter 2; “table A.1” is the first table in appendix A.

104 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


Refer to the “Boxes” section of this appendix for information on numbering tables
that appear in boxes.
Sources. Sources for tables are treated the same as sources for text. All tables need
to have source lines.
• Use author-date style to refer readers to a publication. Make sure that the full
bibliographic information is included in the reference list at the end of each
chapter.
• The World Bank’s Legal Department has directed that a source line of “Authors”
should not be used because it can create confusion over copyright ownership.
Examples
If tables are original and use text and not data, then list “World Bank” as the
source line.
If tables use World Bank data, then cite the data source as specifically as possible,
for example, “World Development Indicators Database.” In the absence of this
information, provide a note specifying “World Bank data” as the source. It is
acceptable to start the source line with “An elaboration of…” or “based on…”
or similar language. Do not use “Authors” or “Author’s compilation.”
If tables use non–World Bank data owned by a third party, then use a standard
source line.
If tables are (a) owned by a third party (not the World Bank) and (b) require
permission, then use the following line: “Source: [author-date citation], ©[copyright
owner]. Reproduced with permission from [copyright owner]; further permission
required for reuse.”
Text references. Make sure that each table is discussed, by number, in the text.
• Place tables not directly pertinent to the text but of interest to readers in an
annex to the chapter or an appendix to the book.
Titles. Check that every table has a descriptive title that covers What + Where +
When.
• Be aware that the table will be electronically searchable and might be viewed
apart from the text in an electronic iteration.
• Avoid using ellipses or dashes to connect one table title to the next.
• Avoid using the World Bank’s regional abbreviations (AFR or SSA, EAP, ECA,
LAC, MNA or MENA, and SAR).
Unit indicators. Provide a unit indicator for the table as a whole or for individual
rows and columns when more than one unit is used in the table.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 105


A P P E N D I X A . 8  
EDITORIAL QUALITY CONTROL
CHECKLIST

A. GENERAL TASKS

1. Conduct routine check of formatting:

• Delete extra spaces after periods.

• Convert spaced en-dashes and spaced hyphens to closed-up em-dashes.

• Check that en-dashes are used in date ranges rather than hyphens.
If ­possible, convert yyyy–yyyy style date ranges to yyyy–yy style, using an
en-dash, as long as the two dates have the same first two digits.

• Endnotes:
◦ Set superscript notes as endnotes; insert instructions to move endnotes
to precede references. Do not remove the connection in Word between
the note marker and the note itself; in other words, do not manually
manipulate notes for numbering and placement. We need to retain the
automatic renumbering feature until we are ready for typesetting.

◦ If any of the endnotes contain only author-date citations, put them in


body text and remove the endnotes.

• Check that double quotation marks are used in the text; within double
quotation marks, use single quotation marks, where appropriate.

• Delete any spaces after $, for example, “US$5 million.”


• Check that all URLs in the references have a period at the end.

• Delete any numbering in headings and paragraphs, unless the production


editor indicates otherwise.

• Remove any boldface or italics applied to the first sentence of every


­paragraph, unless the production editor indicates otherwise.

• Format the levels of all headings and graphics titles as either headline style
(applies to most books) or sentence style (applies to some World Bank
flagships); the production editor will indicate which style to apply. Note
that in headline style, not every word is capitalized; for example, “UNESCO”
would not become “Unesco”; for details, please see Chicago. In sentence
style, make sure you manually review the change to avoid lowercasing
proper nouns and abbreviations.

• Front matter:
◦ Ensure that the front matter elements are in the following order; if they
are not, rearrange to comply as needed: half-title page, title page,
copyright page, contents, foreword (optional), preface (optional),
acknowledgments (optional), about the authors or editors or list of
contributors (optional), executive summary (optional), abbreviations.
If there is a series page or anything not listed in this bullet, please contact
the production editor for guidance.

106 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


◦ Compile the list of abbreviations used throughout the publication, if not
provided by the authors. If an abbreviations list already exists, verify that all
abbreviations used in the manuscript appear in the list and insert any that are
missing. The abbreviations list in the front matter should be in alphabetical
order by the abbreviation or acronym rather than by the spelled-out text.

• Chapter titles and headings:

◦ Apply any missing styles to headings to indicate the appropriate levels on


the basis of existing styles or tags provided in the manuscript.

◦ Ensure the heading hierarchy does not move from A and B heads to
run-in headings, skipping C heads.

◦ Ensure that there is an A-level heading above the opening paragraph of


each chapter.

• Graphics quality:

◦ If cover images, figures, maps, or other graphics files appear to be low-­


resolution, check the image size to see if the resolution can be improved.

◦ If the quality can be improved, do so; if it cannot, insert queries to the


authors and production editor that higher-resolution files are needed (for
example, “[[AQ: The resolution of this image is too low to print well.
Please provide a high-resolution image.]]”).

◦ Our intention is to resolve any discrepancies between figures in the manu-


script Word files and those in the Excel files (if provided) before the manu-
script is sent to Datapage for editorial QC or typesetting. If we have failed to
do this or have had to skip this step for whatever reason and the production
editor does send Excel files during the QC, please flag any discrepancies and
query them in the Word file, as noted in F.3 in this appendix.

2. Conduct routine check of text:

• Abbreviations

◦ Spell out abbreviations at first use in every chapter.

◦ Spell out the abbreviations “i.e.” as “that is” and “e.g.” as “for example.”

• Author queries: Insert necessary author queries into the Word files using the
Comments function.

• Capitalization and spelling: Make capitalization and spelling correct and in


accordance with The Chicago Manual of Style, 17th edition, and the
World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide.

• Cross-references

◦ Be aware of text cross-references to other parts of the book. Query any


cross-references that refer to parts that are missing.

◦ If possible, flag vague cross-references (such as “see the next section,”


“see above”) so that an editor can replace them with specific language
(such as the section title, chapter number, figure number, or “the section
on [section title in lowercase]”).

◦ Ensure that page numbers are not used in cross-references of items within
the manuscript.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 107


• Non-English text:

◦ Use roman rather than italics for non-English words.


◦ Insert query for English translations of non-English text.
◦ Resolve inconsistencies in the spelling and diacritics of proper names and
foreign words; communicate your resolution to the production editor.
• Numbers:
◦ Spell out numbers one through nine.
◦ Use a comma for four or more digits, for example, 4,000.
◦ In series in the text, use Arabic rather than roman numbers, for example,
“(1)” rather than “(i).”
◦ Add space to unit indicators in text, for example, “5 km.”
◦ Use “percent” in text. OK to use “%” in figures and tables.

B. COUNTRY NAMES AND MAPS

1. Check all country names and maps:


• Follow World Bank conventions for specifying country and economy names.
Do not change the order of the countries as provided in the manuscript.
Important: Do not replace “Korea” with “Democratic Republic of Korea”;
in most cases, “Korea” should be “Republic of Korea” (full name needed
only on the first mention in the chapter). Pay particular attention to
China; Hong Kong SAR, China; Macao SAR, China; and Taiwan, China,
which are economies and should never be referred to as countries.
Change any occurrences of “Swaziland” to “Eswatini.” Use “South
Sudan” rather than “Republic of Sudan.”
• Tables and figures have different requirements from text when it comes
to country names; please see the World Bank Group Publications
Editorial Style Guide appendix C for guidance.
• Ensure there are no country maps of India, other than as part of the region or
the world. Individual province maps are allowed; however, the provinces of
Jammu Kashmir, Azad Jammu Kashmir, and Arunachal Pradesh should not be
depicted. The three provinces also should not appear in tables, figures, or text.

C. LISTS

1. Ensure consistency in the handling of lists with respect to punctuation:


• Delete all end-of-line punctuation, except the final period at the end of a list
consisting of incomplete sentences.
• Use initial capitalization for the first word of each bullet.
• Check that in cases where numbering [(1), (2), (3)] or lettering [(a), (b), (c)] is
used, the numbers or letters are sequential.

D. ANNEXES AND APPENDIXES

1. Check the text for the correct use and treatment of “annex” and “appendix.”

• Annex:

108 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


◦ Use “annex” for additional material that is placed at the end of, and is
pertinent to, a specific chapter.

◦ Use numbers in the titles of annexes by chapter. For example, the first
annex to the text of chapter 5 would be “Annex 5A,” and the second
annex to the text of chapter 5 would be “Annex 5B.”

◦ Use numbering even if there is only one annex.

◦ Use the lowercase in the titles of annexes in text mentions, for example,
“in annex 5A.”

• Appendix:

◦ Use “appendix” for material that is placed at the end of, and is pertinent
to, the entire book.

◦ Use letters in the titles of appendixes. For example, the first appendix
would be “Appendix A”; the second appendix would be “Appendix B.”

◦ Use lettering even if there is only one appendix.


◦ Use numbers to distinguish subparts of appendixes, for example,
“Appendix A.1” would be the first subpart of the first appendix.

◦ Use lowercase in the titles of appendixes in text mentions, for example,


“in appendix 5A.”

E. BOXES

1. Ensure that boxes are correctly numbered and appear in sequential order.

2. Ensure that every box is referred to by number in the text; the in-text reference
should be lowercase (for example, “As shown in box 1.1”). If a text callout is
missing, insert a query (for example, “[[AQ: Box 1.1 is not mentioned in the
text. Insert a text callout to the box.]]”). In the query, do not use the word
“citation” because it can be misunderstood to mean source information.

3. Convert any numbered notes in boxes to lowercase letters, and place footnote
text at the base of the boxes. These notes should not be part of the chapter
endnote sequence.

4. Ensure that figures and tables inside boxes are numbered and titled. In the box,
number the figures and tables according to the following example for the first
figure in box 2.1: “Figure B2.1.1.” In the “Figures” section of the table of
contents, this box figure should be listed as number “B2.1.1.”

5. Do not query authors if a box is missing a source line. Note that this instruction
does not apply to figures, maps, photographs, or tables.

6. Treat abbreviations in boxes independently of abbreviations in the text; spell out


the terms at first occurrence in the box, and use the abbreviations in subsequent
mentions.

7. Use box tagging (<Start of box>) and (<End of box>).

F. FIGURES AND TABLES

1. Keep the figures in place in the text, and insert typesetter instructions directly
below each figure in the Word file; do not set up a separate figures file by
chapter.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 109


2. Ensure that all figures and tables have titles, are correctly numbered, and appear
in numerical order.

3. Insert a query in the Word file if there is a discrepancy between the figure in the
Word file and any corresponding Excel or Stata file.

4. Ensure that every part of a figure, such as a panel, is identified by a letter and a
text title.

5. Axis titles, legends, and labels:

• Ensure that axis titles, legends, and labels are present in all figures with axes.

• Ensure that axis titles and axis labels use sentence-style capitalization.

6. Empty cells in tables:

• Ensure that every cell in a table has content; insert queries where any cells
are empty.

• If cells have a dash, insert an author query to define the dash, asking
whether it stands for “not available” or “not applicable.” (For example,
“[[AQ: What do empty cells indicate? Not available? Not applicable?]]”
or “[[AQ: Does a dash indicate ‘not available’ or ‘not applicable’?]]”).

• If a dash is used to indicate “not applicable,” change it to “n.a.” Query if


meaning is unclear.
7. Note:

• Spell out all abbreviations in tables and figures in the Note section, even if
previously spelled out in the text.

• Use singular for “Note” even if more than one element is used.

8. Sources:

• Ensure that every figure and table has a source; query if no source is
provided.

9. Text callouts:

• Ensure that every figure and table is mentioned by number in the text; use
the lowercase for the in-text callout (for example, “As shown in figure 1.1”).

• If a callout is missing, insert a query (for example, “[[AQ: Figure 1.1 is not
mentioned in the text. Please insert a text callout to the figure.]]”).
Do not use the word “citation” because it can be misunderstood to mean
source information.
10. Unit indicators:

• Figures: Ensure that unit indicators are present in every figure that does not
use axes.

• Tables: Ensure that unit indicators only appear above tables when they apply
to the entire table.

11. In figure- and table-related text (in the note or body text), flag instances in which
any figure or note content is referred to by its color. This is important; mentions of
color will need to be updated if the typeset content uses different colors from the
manuscript, which often ends up being the case.

12. Remove the end dot from the legends of figures, maps, and tables.

110 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


13. Insert a query regarding the use of shading in tables, asking the authors to
confirm that it is intentional.

G. MAPS

1. Ensure that every map has a number and text title, is styled and numbered
separately from figures, uses the same two-digit numbering convention as figures
and tables, has a corresponding text callout, and appears sequentially.

2. Check that each panel in a map with multiple panels has its own letter and text
title.

3. Query if there is no source listed; the source should be in addition to the IBRD
number and date slug that appears inside World Bank maps. (In addition to
that slug, if a departmental logo and disclaimer paragraph appear in World
Bank maps, add a query to indicate that these should be deleted.) For
non-World Bank maps, a source as well as a permission line must appear
below the figure.

H. MATHEMATICS

1. Apply two-digit numbering if an equation is set on its own line, for example,
“1.3” for the third equation in chapter 1.
2. Ensure that equation numbering is sequential.

I. PHOTOGRAPHS

1. Ensure that every photograph has a number and title, is styled and numbered
separately from the figures, uses the same two-digit numbering convention as
figures and tables, has a corresponding text callout, and appears sequentially.

2. Insert a query if a photograph is missing a source line and “further permission


required” notice, for example, “[[AQ: Please indicate the source [photogra-
pher/copyright holder] of this photo.]]”).

J. SOURCE DOCUMENTATION (CITATIONS, REFERENCES, AND


­BIBLIOGRAPHIES): WHAT TO LOOK FOR

1. Check text citations against the reference list. Query the author for any missing
references. Bibliographies, unlike References, may include uncited items.

2. Query in the following instances:

• If the heading is “Bibliography” rather than “References.”

• If entries do not have an author name, date, title, and publisher (for books)
or an author name, date, article title, journal title, volume number, and issue
number (for journals).

• If the location of the publisher is missing.

• If page numbers of a journal article are missing.

• If an exact date, location, sponsor, or any other detail of a conference is


missing.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 111


3. Wherever possible, provide missing information and resolve any inconsistencies
between the text citation and the reference list entry; query if ambiguous.

4. Convert “ibid.” and “op. cit.” to author-date citations. (Do not italicize “et al.” in
citations.)

5. Correct the list order if any reference is out of alphabetical sequence. Follow the
style guide with regard to publications by the same authoring team or by
different authoring teams where the lead author is the same.

6. Ensure that publication titles are all title case; this rule does not apply to foreign
titles, which should not be converted to title case if they are in sentence case.

7. If the same author (or authoring team) has several separately cited publications,
use the name (or set of names) in the first entry. Replace the name(s) with a 3-em
dash and period in subsequent entries.

K. SOURCE DOCUMENTATION: WHAT TO IGNORE


1. Do not query in the following instances:

• If page numbers are missing from a chapter in a book.

• If you are unsure whether a publication is formal (book) or informal (for


example, a paper).

• If a reference is for a publication in a language other than English.

• Whether to move databases from the references to the endnotes; it is


acceptable for databases to be included in the references.

2. Do not make the list consistent by replacing first names with initials. Do query if
only last names are used (this is uncommon).

3. Do not ask for an “accessed by” date if a Web reference does not list it. Do not
remove it if included.

L. FILE PREPARATION

Upon completion of the editorial QC, provide the redlined Word file(s) and clean
Word file(s) (with changes accepted and tracking left on to capture further changes)
to the production editor.

112 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


A P P E N D I X A . 9  
E X C E L F I G U R E P R E PA R AT I O N
GUIDELINES
Excel Figure Preparaon Guidelines

Please supply the data for any graphs in your manuscript. This set of instruc ons assumes that you are using
Excel for your data; if you are using STATA, please save and send your images as eps files and make sure that
the eps file name corresponds to the figure number used in the manuscript.

Make sure that your Excel worksheet shows the graph and the data on the same sheet and that the graph in
Excel matches the graph in your manuscript.

The graph and its data should appear on the same sheet in close
proximity to one another.

Avoid separang graphs and data across mulple tabs.

For bar graphs, all labels on the horizontal axis


should be located directly under the data bars.

For line graphs and sca er plots, however,


labels on the horizontal axis should be placed
under the ck mark corresponding to the data
point on the graph.

For graphs displaying years along the horizontal


axis, the first year should appear at the ver cal
axis and subsequent years should appear under
the ck marks along the axis.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 113


If two or more graphs are measuring the same variable, make sure that the data sets are properly framed for
scale and comparison. (For example, two graphs for different countries showing FDI from 2001–2007 should
show the same range on the vercal axis.)

Make sure the axes of like


figures have the same range
and that they are set at visually
appropriate intervals.

Make sure all axes are


properly and
comparavely framed.

To change the range and intervals of the axes, click on the graph and under the “Layout” tab select“Axes,”choose “Primary
Horizontal or Vercal Axis,” and click on “More Axis Opons.”

114 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


To manually format the axis range, under “Axis Opons” select “Fixed” as the “Minimum” and “Maximum” values and then
type in the desired range. For the interval value, select “Fixed” as the “Major unit” and then type in the desired interval.

To change where the x and y axes intersect, under “Vercal (or Horizontal) axis crosses,” select the “Axis value” opon and type
in the desired intersecon point on that axis. The default is for the graph to intersect at the midpoint of each axis.

Delete any extraneous data and sheets from data workbooks delivered to the publishing unit. To delete a
worksheet, right click on the tab name and select "Delete."

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 115


Ensure that the Excel worksheet tabs reflect the figure numbers in your manuscript. (For example, figure 5.1
in your manuscript should have a corresponding dataset in a tab marked "fig. 5.1.") To rename a worksheet,
right-click on the tab and select "Rename."

Right-click on the tab and select “Rename.”

Type the new tab name and hit Enter.

116 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


A P P E N D I X B . 1  
PROOFREADING CHECKLIST
F O R C AT E G O R I E S 1 A N D 2
The following is a list of proofreading tasks for first-page proofs. Proofreaders
should limit their work to these specified tasks and should not seek to improve the
text at this stage.

The following is a list of potential proofreading tasks. The production editor will
indicate which tasks are to be performed.

FIRST PAGE PROOFS

General Tasks
• Using the Adobe Acrobat guidance in appendix B.2 of this guide, make needed
changes or indicate queries.

• Update the editorial style sheet, and provide it to the production editor.

Formatting
• Check the page proofs against the specifications for the book or series.

• Check each design element for consistency: boxes, chapter titles, figures, folios,
headings, lists, paragraph styles, notes, running heads, and tables.

• Check for stacks of words or hyphens. A stack of three or fewer is acceptable.

• Mark widows.

Text
• Check the table of contents against the text.

• Correct glaring grammatical errors. Do not worry about awkwardness, lack of


clarity, or technical language.

• Using the current style sheet, correct errors or inconsistencies in punctuation,


capitalization, and spelling throughout (including in figures and tables).

Please note: If a particular punctuation styling or word choice has been used
consistently throughout the book but is not in accordance with the style guide, do
not change it; for example, do not change “linkages” to “links” or do not set off
“In 2018 many of the reforms…” by a comma. Clear errors in grammar or spelling
should be corrected.

• Ensure that abbreviations are spelled out at first mention in each chapter.

• Verify that correct country names have been used throughout. Query country
names that do not appear alphabetically unless there is a reason for a different
order to be used.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 117


• Query inconsistencies in the spelling and diacritics of proper names and foreign
words.

• Ensure that all endnote numbers are present in the text, are consecutively
numbered, and have corresponding endnotes.

References
• Check source citations against the reference or bibliography list.
• Check line breaks for DOIs and URLs, follow Chicago 14.18.

Boxes
• Verify that text boxes are correctly numbered, appear in sequential order and
position (in relation to the text reference), and are referenced in the text.

• Verify that notes within boxes use lowercase letters and are placed at the end of
the box.

Figures
• Verify that figures are correctly numbered, appear in sequential order and
position (in relation to the text reference), and are referenced in the text.

• Check that every figure within a box has a number and title. The figures in boxes
should be numbered according to the following example: Figure B2.1.1, in
which “B” indicates that the figure is in a box, “2.1” identifies the box number
(it is the first box in chapter 2), and “.1” indicates that this figure is the first in
box 2.1.

• Check source lines for all figures.

If the authors have used data to create original figures, they should indicate the
sources of the data in the source lines (for example, “Data from World Develop-
ment Indicators database” or, less preferably because of the lack of specificity,
“World Bank data”).

If the authors have created original figures that do not use data, such as
­flowcharts, then list “World Bank” as the source line. The World Bank Legal
Department has directed that a source line of “Authors” should not be used
because it can create confusion over copyright ownership.

• Verify that nonstandard abbreviations and symbols used in figures are defined in
a note.

• Ensure that axis titles and labels are present in figures with axes and that the
labels follow sentence-style capitalization. Ensure that unit indicators have been
provided for all other figures.

• Point out inconsistencies between the data in figures and the text. Flag the error
if you think the wrong figure is called out in the text.

Maps
• Check that every map has a label, is numbered separately from figures, uses
the same two-digit numbering convention as figures and tables, and has a
­corresponding text callout.

• Check that every map has a source line. If the map was created by the World
Bank, the source line should include the IBRD number and date of approval
(month/year).

118 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


• Inside the map image, the GSD logo and the disclaimer fine print should be
removed. The IBRD number and date should stay (even though this information
is shown in the source line).

Photographs
• Check that every photograph has a title and number, is numbered separately
from the figures, and uses the same two-digit numbering convention as for
figures and tables.
• Photographs must list the copyright holder in the source line. The source line
must follow one of two conventions:
▪ World Bank photographs: © Scott Wallace / World Bank. Further permission
required for reuse.
▪ Non–World Bank photographs: © Ami Vitale / Panos Pictures. Used with the
permission of Ami Vitale / Panos Pictures. Further permission required for reuse.

Tables
• Verify that tables are correctly numbered, appear in sequential order and
position (in relation to the text reference), and are referenced in the text.

• Check that every table within a box has a number and title. The tables in boxes
should be numbered according to the following example: Table B2.1.1, in
which “B” indicates that the table is in a box, “2.1” identifies the box number
(it is the first box in chapter 2), and “.1” indicates that this table is the first in
box 2.1.

• Check source lines for all tables. If the author compiled data to create a
table, provide the source of the data (for example, “Data from World Devel-
opment Indicators database” or, less preferably because of the lack of
specificity, “World Bank data”). If the authors have created an original table
that does not use data, use “World Bank” as the source line. The World Bank
Legal Department has directed that a source line of “Authors” should not be
used because it can create confusion over copyright ownership.

• Check that all nonstandard abbreviations and symbols used in a table, including
as part of the title or unit indicator, are defined in a note to the table and are
listed in alphabetical order.

• Ensure that unit indicators are provided in tables whenever appropriate.

• If a table runs for more than one page, check that continued lines are provided
and column heads are repeated.

• Check that every table has a column heading.

• Check that there are no blank cells within a table (except regression tables).

• Point out inconsistencies between the data in tables and the text.

SECOND PAGE PROOFS

• Ensure that all changes from the first page proofs were properly made and that
no new errors were introduced.
• Carefully read all title page text for accuracy.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 119


• Check the table of contents against the contributor list (if any), all text openers
(including chapters, foreword, acknowledgments), the running heads or footers,
and the text headings (usually level A headings only) to ensure the consistency
and correctness of titles, authors’ or contributors’ names, and page numbers.
Check lists of boxes, figures, maps, and tables against the text to make certain
that all are accounted for and are in sequence.

• Check the sequence of all pages (both with folios and blind) to ensure that they
are in the correct order and that no pages are missing.

• Check running heads or footers for alignment and correct recto or verso
placement. Check for accuracy against the book title, part title, chapter title,
and author’s name.

• Check page alignment and margins throughout.

120 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


A P P E N D I X B . 2  
ADOBE A C R O B AT I N S T R U C T I O N S
AND EXAMPLES
Following these instructions will ensure that substantial amounts of your time
and ours will not be wasted owing to wrong or needlessly duplicative tool use.

ADOBE ACROBAT INSTRUCTIONS

Marking Up Page Proofs Using the Annotations Toolset


If you do not have the full version of Adobe Acrobat, you need to use the free Adobe Reader version
X or higher to access the commenting functions described here. To mark up a page proof, please use
the commenting tools (which appear under the Annotations heading of the Comment pane on the
right side of the page) as follows:

Add sticky note (PLEASE USE INFREQUENTLY): Highlight text: Use Attach file: Use this tool
Use this tool only to make a global change or to this tool to highlight a to add an attachment
add a general comment, such as “This figure looks word or several words (for instance, if you’re
too big. Please reduce size.” Do not use this tool and add a comment providing a replacement
to make changes to wording or punctuation, unless that applies to the table or paragraph in a
you cannot attach such a change to a text string. highlighted phrase. Word or Excel file).

Strikethrough: Add note to replace text: Insert text at cursor:


Use this tool to Use this tool to cross out and insert Use this tool to insert text in a
delete text. replacement text. If possible, use this precise location (e.g., before,
tool the most, because it will enable after, or inside a word).
you to most clearly communicate
your changes.

See the section in this appendix titled “Selected Markup Examples Using Adobe Acrobat’s
Annotation Tools” for an illustration of best practice for each tool. Note that some tools go
unmentioned in this guidance document because they are not needed.

Important notes:

PDFs will open in pan-and-drag mode; you must first switch to cursor mode (indicated by a cursor
symbol on the main toolbar; its official name is "Selection tool for text and images" and it is next to
the hand icon) before you can click inside your PDF's content areas with any precision.

The right-hand pane may be hidden when you open your PDF. Click on the tiny arrow on the right
edge to reveal the pane, then click on "Comment" to display the Comment pane mentioned above.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 121


DRAWING MARKUPS: TOOLS OF LAST RESORT

The Comment pane also offers another full set of tools called Drawing Markups.
These tools should be secondary to the commenting tools described above;
however, they can be useful for clarifying instructions on figures, tables, or images.
Please use them judiciously, however, as it is often enough to insert a single arrow
or text callout as opposed to drawing multiple proofer’s marks. Remember, we are
not trying to duplicate the hardcopy experience with the electronic workflow.

Printing Comments
Once your comments have been entered into the document, we have found it is
not worthwhile to attempt printing them out. It does not work well with the defaults
that Adobe products have built in.

Consolidating Comments from Multiple Users


Book editors dealing with comments from multiple authors (for example, World
Bank task team leaders who oversee the work of contributors) and production
editors who receive comments from authors and proofreaders need to know how to
consolidate these comments.

To merge comments from two PDFs into a single PDF file, first select one of the PDFs
to serve as the “master” copy. Resave the selected PDF and mark it by adding
“_master.pdf” to the end of the file name. For this example, the page with the
highlighted text will serve as the master.

Working now in the master file, (1) click


the “options” icon on the Comments
List, and (2) select “Import Data File ….”
In the window that appears, select the
file that contains the comments you want
to import, and click “Open.”
The new comments will be added to
the master file and will appear in the
Comments List. Don’t forget to save
the file again after importing new
comments.

122 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


SELECTED MARKUP EXAMPLES USING ADOBE ACROBAT’S
ANNOTATION TOOLS

There are multiple ways to add revision instructions and comments to a document
using Acrobat’s Annotation Tools. Proofreaders and authors should note that the
objective is not to duplicate the hardcopy markup experience (for instance, by
resorting to the Drawing Tools to mimic a pencil), but rather to use these tools in a
way that enables the recipient of the markup to review the changes electronically.

These guidelines are not exhaustive (that is, they do not cover all options available
in the software), but they do cover pretty much every markup need we encounter at
the World Bank. In all instances, best practice is to be as clear, precise, and
restrained as possible. (By “restrained” we mean: there is no need to highlight or
draw a circle around a change you’ve made, no matter how small. We review all the
revisions by going through the comments that appear in Acrobat’s Comment pane,
which displays all changes, big or small, with equal prominence. In general, you
should avoid extraneous commands.)

1. Text and punctuation can be inserted, replaced, changed, or deleted using


the appropriate “Annotations” tool:

Insert text    Replace text    Strikethrough  


at cursor

Example: Mark text and punctuation for insertion in the middle of a sentence.

Place the cursor in the PDF text where the new text should be inserted.
Click the “Insert text at cursor” icon, and type the text to be inserted
into the text box. (You can also just start typing; the program should
open a text insertion comment and show your typed text.) In all cases, include
only the language to be added, with no extraneous words, as shown. Do not
write, “insert…” If you must add an additional instruction, use a separate line
and add that instruction in brackets, for example, <<Make sure you don’t add a
comma at the end>>. (This kind of instruction is rarely necessary.)

Example: Mark text for correction, replacement, or to be


rearranged.

Highlight the incorrect text, and click the “Replace text” icon.
Type the correction into the text box. (You can also simply start
typing; the program should open a text replacement comment and
show your typed text.)

Example: Remove an entire sentence from the text.

Highlight the text to be deleted, and click the “Strikethrough”


icon or hit the “Delete” key on your keyboard as a shortcut.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 123


2. T
 ypographical changes can be requested by using the “Add note to text”
tool:

The typesetters with whom we work are adept at interpreting novel instructions.
Often, a single note can take the place of multiple individual marks. Such instruc-
tions can speed up the time it takes to edit and review. However, please remem-
ber to use “Add note to text” only when it is more effective than the Annotation
tools.
Note: To avoid confusion, place any instruction or comment that is not replacing
or correcting text in <<double angle brackets>>.

Example: Italicize text.

Select the text to be italicized and click the “Add note to text” icon to
add the yellow highlight. Then double-click the highlighted text to open
the comment window.

Enter the instruction to the typesetter in the text box.


➙ Similar instructions can be given to <<bold>>; <<rom>> (that is, plain text, not
bold or italic); <<rebreak>>; <<run back>>; <<em dash>>; <<en dash>>; and
so forth.

Example: Changing journal titles to book titles with a single instruction.

Select the title and click the “Add note to text” icon to add the yellow
highlight. Then double-click the highlighted text to open the comment
window. Enter the instructions to the typesetter into the text box.

This method is better than using two deletions to eliminate the quotes and
a highlight to change plain text to italic.

But sometimes the Annotation tools are still your first, best option, as in the
next example.

Example: Changing sentence case to headline-style capitalization with a single


instruction.

Highlight and copy text (Ctrl+C) and click the “Replace text” icon.
Paste the text (Ctrl+V) into the text box. Edit the text with correct capitaliza-
tion, and retain appropriate formatting (such as italics) as needed. This way
you won’t have to insert a text replacement for each letter you capitalize.

Note: Italicized, bold-faced, underlined, superscript, or subscript text can also


be inserted by use of the “Text style” menu in the text box. When adding or
replacing text, highlight the new text in the text box, and right click on it.
Scroll to “Text style,” and select the format you want the text to take.

124 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


The text style menu can be accessed at any time, whether the comment is
detached from the Comment pane or embedded in it, as shown in the screen-
shots above.

3. If (and only if) the four Annotation tools covered above cannot convey your
change or instruction, use a Sticky Note, and please be as clear, precise, and
minimal as possible.

Example: Comment on a figure.

Note that the normally undesirable sticky comment tool was used in this case because
there was no obvious text string to attach a Text Highlight comment to. And in the
text of the comment, note that the instructions were enclosed in angled brackets;
actual text to be typeset would not be.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 125


A P P E N D I X B . 3  
SAMPLE C O P Y R I G H T PA G E
This page of highly negotiated text is provided simply as a sample and so that
proofreaders can check the copyright year and the Attribution line. Copyeditors
or proofreaders should not make changes to copyright pages to conform to
World Bank style.

© 2020 International Bank for Reconstruction and Development / The World Bank
1818 H Street NW, Washington, DC 20433
Telephone: 202-473-1000; internet: www.worldbank.org

Some rights reserved

1 2 3 4 23 22 21 20

This work is a product of the staff of The World Bank with external contributions. The findings, interpreta-
tions, and conclusions expressed in this work do not necessarily reflect the views of The World Bank, its
Board of Executive Directors, or the governments they represent. The World Bank does not guarantee the
accuracy of the data included in this work. The boundaries, colors, denominations, and other information
shown on any map in this work do not imply any judgment on the part of The World Bank concerning the
legal status of any territory or the endorsement or acceptance of such boundaries.

Nothing herein shall constitute or be considered to be a limitation upon or waiver of the privileges and
immunities of The World Bank, all of which are specifically reserved.

Rights and Permissions

This work is available under the Creative Commons Attribution 3.0 IGO license (CC BY 3.0 IGO) http://
creativecommons.org/licenses/by/3.0/igo. Under the Creative Commons Attribution license, you are free to
copy, distribute, transmit, and adapt this work, including for commercial purposes, under the following
conditions:

Attribution—Please cite the work as follows: [[Production editor: Insert the complete, correct citation here
followed by the DOI. The following is an example: Galvanovska, Natalija, Michel Rogy, and Carlo Maria
Rossotto. 2020. Broadband Networks in the Middle East and North Africa: Accelerating High-Speed
Internet Access. <Add series name if the book is in a series>. Washington, DC: World Bank.
doi:10.1596/978-1-4648-1112-9.]] License: Creative Commons Attribution CC BY 3.0 IGO

Translations—If you create a translation of this work, please add the following disclaimer along with the
attribution: This translation was not created by The World Bank and should not be considered an official
World Bank translation. The World Bank shall not be liable for any content or error in this translation.

Adaptations—If you create an adaptation of this work, please add the following disclaimer along with the
attribution: This is an adaptation of an original work by The World Bank. Views and opinions expressed in
the adaptation are the sole responsibility of the author or authors of the adaptation and are not endorsed
by The World Bank.

Third-party content—The World Bank does not necessarily own each component of the content contained
within the work. The World Bank therefore does not warrant that the use of any third-party-owned individual
component or part contained in the work will not infringe on the rights of those third parties. The risk of claims
resulting from such infringement rests solely with you. If you wish to reuse a component of the work, it is your
responsibility to determine whether permission is needed for that reuse and to obtain permission from the
copyright owner. Examples of components can include, but are not limited to, tables, figures, or images.

All queries on rights and licenses should be addressed to World Bank Publications, The World Bank Group,
1818 H Street NW, Washington, DC 20433, USA; email: [email protected].

ISBN (paper):
ISBN (electronic):
DOI:

Cover photo: [[image credit, if applicable]]


Sample credit for a non-WB image: © Ami Vitale / Panos Pictures. Used with the permission of Ami Vitale /
Panos Pictures. Further permission required for reuse.
Sample credit for a WB image: © Curt Carnemark / World Bank. Further permission required for reuse.
Cover design: [[Designer credit, if applicable]]

Library of Congress Control Number: XXXXXXXXXX

126 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


A P P E N D I X C  
C O U N T RY, E C O N O M Y, A N D
T E R R I T O RY N A M E S
This list is based on the World Bank Corporate Secretariat’s list of official country
and economy names and adjectives. For names that are not listed here, refer to
Merriam-Webster’s Collegiate Dictionary, 11th edition.

COUNTRY/ECONOMY NOUN (PLURAL IN ADJECTIVE OF


NAME PARENTHESES) NATIONALITY SPECIAL TREATMENT (IF ANY)

Afghanistan Afghan(s) Afghan


Albania Albanian(s) Albanian
Algeria Algerian(s) Algerian
Andorra Andorran(s) Andorran
Angola Angolan(s) Angola or Angolan
Antigua and Barbuda Antiguan(s), Barbudan(s) Antiguan, Barbudan Antigua and Barbuda (no short form).
Argentina Argentine(s) Argentine
Armenia Armenian(s) Armenian
Aruba Aruban(s) Aruban
Australia Australian(s) Australian
Austria Austrian(s) Austrian
Azerbaijan Azerbaijani(s) Azerbaijan or Azerbaijani
Bahamas, The Bahamian(s) Bahamas or Bahamian Use The Bahamas in text; Bahamas, The in tables
and figures.
Bahrain Bahraini(s) Bahrain or Bahraini
Bangladesh Bangladeshi(s) Bangladesh or Bangladeshi
Barbados Barbadian(s) Barbados or Barbadian
Belarus Belarussian(s) Belarussian
Belgium Belgian(s) Belgian
Belize Belizean(s) Belize or Belizean
Benin Beninese (sing./pl.) Beninese
Bermuda Bermudan(s) or Bermudan or Bermudian
Bermudian(s)
Bhutan Bhutanese (sing./pl.) Bhutanese
Bolivia, Plurinational Bolivian(s) Bolivian In publication or document titles, use the
State of Plurinational State of Bolivia. In figures, tables,
and running text, use Bolivia.
Bosnia and Herzegovina Bosnian(s) Bosnian
Botswana Motswana (sing.), Botswana
Batswana (pl.)
Brazil Brazilian(s) Brazilian
Brunei Darussalam Bruneian(s) Brunei or Bruneian
Bulgaria Bulgarian(s) Bulgarian
Burkina Faso Burkinabe (sing./pl.) Burkinabe Never Upper Volta

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 127


COUNTRY/ECONOMY NOUN (PLURAL IN ADJECTIVE OF
NAME PARENTHESES) NATIONALITY SPECIAL TREATMENT (IF ANY)

Burma (see Myanmar) Never use except in historical contexts.


Burundi Murundi (sing.), Barundi (pl.) Burundi
Cabo Verde Cabo Verdean(s) Cabo Verdean Not Cape Verde
Cambodia Cambodian(s) Cambodian Democratic Kampuchea from 1975 to 1979
Cameroon Cameroonian(s) Cameroonian
Canada Canadian(s) Canadian
Cayman Islands Caymanian(s) Caymanian
Central African Republic Central African(s) Central African Avoid CAR. Use the Central African Republic in
text; Central African Republic in tables and figures.
Chad Chadian(s) Chad or Chadian
Channel Islands
Chile Chilean(s) Chilean
China Chinese (sing./pl.) Chinese Not People’s Republic of China.
Colombia Colombian(s) Colombian
Comoros Comorian(s) Comorian Use the Comoros in text; Comoros in tables and
figures.
Congo, Democratic Congolese (sing./pl.) Congolese Use the Democratic Republic of Congo in text;
Republic of Congo, Dem. Rep. in tables and figures. Use Zaire
only in historical contexts.
Congo, Republic of Congolese (sing./pl.) Congolese Use the Republic of Congo in text; Congo, Rep. in
tables and figures.
Costa Rica Costa Rican(s) Costa Rican
Côte d’Ivoire Ivorian(s) Ivorian Never Ivory Coast; note circumflex.
Croatia Croat(s) or Croatian(s) Croat or Croatian
Cuba Cuban(s) Cuban
Cyprus Cypriot(s) Cypriot
Czech Republic Czech(s) Czech Use the Czech Republic in text; Czech Republic in
tables and figures. Use Czechoslovakia only in
historical contexts prior to 1993.
Denmark Dane(s) Danish
Djibouti Djiboutian(s) Djibouti
Dominica Dominican(s) Dominica
Dominican Republic Dominican(s) Dominican Use the Dominican Republic in text; Dominican
Republic in tables and figures.
Ecuador Ecuadoran(s) Ecuadoran
Egypt, Arab Republic of Egyptian(s) Egyptian Use the Arab Republic of Egypt at first mention in
text, Egypt subsequently; always Egypt, Arab Rep.
in tables and figures.
El Salvador Salvadoran(s) Salvadoran
Equatorial Guinea Equatorial Guinean(s) Equatorial Guinean
Eritrea Eritrean(s) Eritrean
Estonia Estonian(s) Estonian
Eswatini Swazi(s) Swazi
Ethiopia Ethiopian(s) Ethiopian
Faroe Islands
Fiji Fijian(s) Fiji
Finland Finn(s) Finnish
France French (sing./pl.) French
French Polynesia

128 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


COUNTRY/ECONOMY NOUN (PLURAL IN ADJECTIVE OF
NAME PARENTHESES) NATIONALITY SPECIAL TREATMENT (IF ANY)

Gabon Gabonese (sing./pl.) Gabonese


Gambia, The Gambian(s) Gambian Use The Gambia in text; Gambia, The, in tables
and figures.
Georgia Georgian(s) Georgian
Germany German(s) German Preferable to the Federal Republic of Germany
when the context is the period after unification in
1989; for the period 1949–89, distinguish between
the Federal Republic of Germany and the German
Democratic Republic; never West Germany (FR of
G) or East Germany (GDR).
Ghana Ghanaian(s) Ghanaian
Great Britain (see
United Kingdom)
Greece Greek(s) Greek
Greenland Greenlander(s) Greenlandic
Grenada Grenadian(s) Grenadian
Guam Guamanian(s) Guamanian
Guatemala Guatemalan(s) Guatemalan
Guinea Guinean(s) Guinean
Guinea-Bissau Guinean(s) Guinea-Bissau
Guyana Guyanese (sing./pl.) Guyana or Guyanese British Guiana before 1966
Haiti Haitian(s) Haitian
Honduras Honduran(s) Honduran
Hong Kong SAR, China  AR should be added in all cases in text and
S
figures and tables.
Do not use Hong Kong, China, or Hong Kong
(China).
Do not spell out special administrative region in
text, figures, or tables. Do add SAR to the
Abbreviations list and spell out.
Do not use country in connection with Hong Kong;
economy is acceptable.
Hungary Hungarian(s) Hungarian
Iceland Icelander(s) Icelandic
India Indian(s) Indian Use Mumbai instead of Bombay.
Indonesia Indonesian(s) Indonesian Java Sea, but Jawa, not Java, for the island.
Iran, Islamic Republic of Iranian(s) Iranian Use the Islamic Republic of Iran in all cases in text;
Iran, Islamic Rep., in tables and figures.
Iraq Iraqi(s) Iraq or Iraqi
Ireland Irishman (men), Irish
Irishwoman (women), Irish
Isle of Man Manxman(s)
Israel Israeli(s) Israel or Israeli
Italy Italian(s) Italian
Ivory Coast (see Côte
d’Ivoire)
Jamaica Jamaican(s) Jamaican
Japan Japanese (sing./pl.) Japanese
Jordan Jordanian(s) Jordanian
Kazakhstan Kazakhstani(s) Kazakhstan or Kazakhstani
Kenya Kenyan(s) Kenyan

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 129


COUNTRY/ECONOMY NOUN (PLURAL IN ADJECTIVE OF
NAME PARENTHESES) NATIONALITY SPECIAL TREATMENT (IF ANY)

Kiribati I-Kiribati Kiribati


Korea, Democratic Korean(s) Korean Never North Korea. Use the Democratic People’s
People’s Republic of Republic of Korea in text; Korea, Dem. People’s
Rep., in tables and figures.
Korea, Republic of Korean(s) Korean Never South Korea. Use the Republic of Korea at
first mention in text, Korea subsequently unless
the Democratic People’s Republic of Korea is also
being discussed, in which case the full formal name
must be used; Korea, Rep., in tables and figures.
Kosovo Kosovar(s) Kosovar
Kuwait Kuwaiti(s) Kuwait or Kuwaiti
Kyrgyz Republic Kyrgyz (sing./pl.) Kyrgyz Use the Kyrgyz Republic in text; Kyrgyz Republic in
tables and figures.
Lao People’s Democratic Lao, the Lao Lao Never Laos. Use the Lao People’s Democratic
Republic Republic at first mention in text, Lao PDR subse-
quently; Lao PDR in tables and figures.
Latvia Latvian(s) Latvian
Lebanon Lebanese (sing./pl.) Lebanese
Lesotho Mosotho (sing.), Lesotho
Basotho (pl.)
Liberia Liberian(s) Liberian
Libya Libyan(s) Libyan
Liechtenstein Liechtensteiner(s)
Lithuania Lithuanian(s) Lithuanian
Luxembourg Luxembourger(s) Luxembourg
Macao SAR, China  AR should be added in all cases in text and
S
figures and tables
Do not use Macao, China, or Macao (China). Do
not spell out special administrative region. Do
add SAR to the Abbreviations list and spell out.
Do not use country in connection with Macao;
economy is acceptable.
Macedonia Only use Macedonia in historical contexts.
(see North Macedonia).
Madagascar Malagasy (sing./pl.) Malagasy
Malawi Malawian(s) Malawian
Malaysia Malaysian(s) Malaysian
Maldives Maldivian(s) Maldivian
Mali Malian(s) Malian
Malta Maltese (sing./pl.) Maltese
Marshall Islands Marshallese (sing./pl.) Marshall Islands Use the Marshall Islands in text; Marshall Islands
in tables and figures.
Mauritania Mauritanian(s) Mauritanian
Mauritius Mauritian(s) Mauritian
Mexico Mexican(s) Mexican
Micronesia, Federated Micronesian(s) Micronesian Use the Federated States of Micronesia in text;
States of Micronesia, Fed. Sts., in tables and figures.
Moldova Moldovan(s) Moldovan
Monaco
Mongolia Mongolian(s) Mongolian
Montenegro Montenegrin(s) Montenegrin Not Serbia and Montenegro except in historical
contexts. Also, only in historical contexts, the
former Yugoslavia may be used in text; Yugoslavia,
former, in tables and figures.

130 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


COUNTRY/ECONOMY NOUN (PLURAL IN ADJECTIVE OF
NAME PARENTHESES) NATIONALITY SPECIAL TREATMENT (IF ANY)

Morocco Moroccan(s) Moroccan


Mozambique Mozambican(s) Mozambican
Myanmar Myanmar Myanmar Never Burma except in historical contexts prior to
1989. The capital is Yangon, not Rangoon.
Namibia Namibian(s) Namibian
Nauru Nauruan
Nepal Nepalese (sing./pl.) Nepalese
Netherlands Netherlander(s) Netherland or Netherlandic Use the Netherlands in text; Netherlands in tables
and figures.
Netherlands Antilles This country name is for historical purposes only;
the country was dissolved in 2010.
New Caledonia
New Zealand New Zealander(s) New Zealand
Nicaragua Nicaraguan(s) Nicaraguan
Niger Nigerien(s) Nigerien
Nigeria Nigerian(s) Nigerian
North Macedonia North Macedonians North Macedonian
Northern Mariana Islands
Norway Norwegian(s) Norwegian
Oman Omani(s) Oman or Omani
Pakistan Pakistani(s) Pakistan or Pakistani
Palau Palauan(s) Palauan
Panama Panamanian(s) Panamanian
Papua New Guinea Papua New Guinean(s) Papua New Guinea
Paraguay Paraguayan(s) Paraguayan
Peru Peruvian(s) Peruvian
Philippines Filipino(s) Philippine Use the Philippines in text; Philippines in tables
and figures.
Poland Pole(s) Polish
Portugal Portuguese (sing./pl.) Portuguese
Puerto Rico (US) Puerto Rican(s) Puerto Rican
Qatar Qatari(s) Qatar or Qatari
Romania Romanian(s) Romanian
Russian Federation Russian(s) Russian Use the Russian Federation at first mention in text,
Russia subsequently; Russian Federation in tables
and figures. Use USSR or Soviet Union only in
historical contexts from 1921 to 1991.
Rwanda Rwandese (sing./pl.) Rwandese
Samoa Samoan(s) Samoan Not Western Samoa.
San Marino Sammarinese (sing./pl.) Sammarinese
São Tomé and Príncipe Saotomean(s) São Tomé and Príncipe No short form; note diacritical marks.
Saudi Arabia Saudi Arabian(s) Saudi Arabian
Senegal Senegalese (sing./pl.) Senegal or Senegalese
Serbia Serbian(s) Serbian Not Serbia and Montenegro except in historical
contexts. Also, only in historical contexts, the
former Yugoslavia may be used in text; Yugoslavia,
former, in tables and figures.
Seychelles Seychellois (sing./pl.) Seychelles Use the Seychelles in text; Seychelles in tables and
figures.
Sierra Leone Sierra Leonean(s) Sierra Leonean

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 131


COUNTRY/ECONOMY NOUN (PLURAL IN ADJECTIVE OF
NAME PARENTHESES) NATIONALITY SPECIAL TREATMENT (IF ANY)

Singapore Singaporean(s) Singapore or Singaporean


Slovak Republic Slovak(s) Slovak Use the Slovak Republic in text; Slovak Republic
in tables and figures. Use Czechoslovakia only in
historical contexts.
Slovenia Slovene(s) or Slovenian(s) Slovene or Slovenian
Solomon Islands Solomon Islander(s) Solomon Islands Use the Solomon Islands in text; Solomon Islands
in tables and figures.
Somalia Somali(s) Somali
South Africa South African(s) South African
South Sudan South Sudanese (sing./pl.) South Sudanese
Soviet Union (see Use only in historical contexts.
Russian Federation)
Spain Spaniard(s) Spanish
Sri Lanka Sri Lankan(s) Sri Lanka
St. Kitts and Nevis Kittitian(s), Nevisian(s) St. Kitts and Nevis No short form.
St. Lucia St. Lucian(s) St. Lucian
St. Vincent and St. Vincentian(s) or St. Vincentian or Vincentian No short form.
the Grenadines Vincentian(s)
Sudan Sudanese (sing./pl.) Sudanese
Suriname Surinamese (sing./pl.) Surinamese
Swaziland (see Eswatini) Only use Swaziland in historical contexts.”
Sweden Swede(s) Swedish
Switzerland Swiss (sing./pl.) Swiss
Syrian Arab Republic Syrian(s) Syrian Use the Syrian Arab Republic at first mention in
text, Syria subsequently; Syrian Arab Republic in
tables and figures.
Taiwan, China Not Taiwan (China). Do not use country in
connection with Taiwan; economy is acceptable.
Tajikistan Tajik(s) Tajik
Tanzania Tanzanian(s) Tanzanian
Thailand Thai(s) Thai
Timor-Leste Not East Timor.
Togo Togolese (sing./pl.) Togolese
Tonga Tongan(s) Tongan
Trinidad and Tobago Trinidadian(s), Trinidad and Tobago No short form.
Tobagonian(s)
Tunisia Tunisian(s) Tunisian
Turkey Turk(s) Turkish
Turkmenistan Turkmen(s) Turkmen
Tuvalu Tuvaluan(s) Tuvaluan
Uganda Ugandan(s) Ugandan
Ukraine Ukrainian(s) Ukrainian Do not use the Ukraine.
United Arab Emirates United Arab Emirates Use the United Arab Emirates in text; United Arab
Emirates in tables and figures.
United Kingdom Briton (British) UK, of the United Use the United Kingdom or UK (n.) or UK (adj.)
Kingdom, British in text; United Kingdom in tables and figures.
In text, United Kingdom is preferred, but the
abbreviation is permitted. See section 8.5.
Great Britain may be used if that is the author’s
preference, it is used consistently, and the
references to the country are passing or historical.

132 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


COUNTRY/ECONOMY NOUN (PLURAL IN ADJECTIVE OF
NAME PARENTHESES) NATIONALITY SPECIAL TREATMENT (IF ANY)

United States American(s) US, of the United States In text, the abbreviation US is permissible when
used as a noun or adjective. When used as a noun,
the United States is preferred, but the abbreviation
is permitted. American is acceptable as an
adjective in passing references.
Uruguay Uruguayan(s) Uruguayan
USSR (see Russian Use only in historical contexts.
Federation)
Uzbekistan Uzbek(s) Uzbek
Vanuatu ni-Vanuatu Vanuatu
Venezuela, República Venezuelan(s) Venezuelan Use República Bolivariana de Venezuela in text
Bolivariana de (yes, every single time); Venezuela, RB, in tables
and figures.
Vietnam Vietnamese (sing./pl.) Vietnamese
Virgin Islands (US)
West Bank and Gaza Do not use country; the term economy is accept-
able. Use only West Bank or Gaza when text or
data apply to only one. Do not use Palestine.
Yemen, Republic of Yemeni(s) Republic of Yemen Use the Republic of Yemen in text; Yemen, Rep.,
in tables and figures. Use People’s Democratic
Republic of Yemen and Arab Republic of Yemen
only in historical contexts; do not use North
Yemen or South Yemen.
Yugoslavia (see Use only in historical contexts.
Montenegro and Serbia)
Zaire (see Congo, Use only in historical contexts.
Democratic Republic of)
Zambia Zambian(s) Zambian
Zimbabwe Zimbabwean(s) Zimbabwean

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 133


APPENDIX D CURRENCY UNITS

Note: The currency units and corresponding country names in this list are from the International
Monetary Fund (IMF). The country, economy, and area names here may not correspond to the
official World Bank listing in appendix C of this guide. The list in this appendix is intended for use
only by editors and proofreaders to check currency units in figures and tables.

CURRENCY UNITS SUBSIDIARY UNITS


Country, economy, Value in terms
or area Singular Plural Adjective Abbreviation Singular Plural of main currency
Afghanistan Afghani Afghanis – Af pul puls Af 0.01
Åland Islands euro a
euros – € cent cents €0.01
Albania lek leks Albanian lek qindar qindarka lek 0.01
Algeria dinar dinars Algerian DA centime centimes DA 0.01
American Samoa dollar dollars US $ or US$ b
cent cents $0.01
Andorra euroa,c euros – € cent cents €0.01
Angola kwanza kwanzas Angolan Kz cêntimo cêntimos Kz 0.01
Anguilla dollar dollars East Caribbean EC$ cent cents EC$0.01
Antigua and Barbuda dollar dollars East Caribbean EC$ cent cents EC$0.01
Argentina peso pesos Argentine Arg$ centavo centavos Arg$0.01
Armenia dram drams Armenian Afl. luma lumas dram 0.01
Aruba florin florins Aruban Af. cent cents Af. 0.01
Australia dollar dollars Australian $A cent cents $A 0.01
Austria euro a
euros – € cent cents €0.01
Azerbaijan manat manat Azerbaijan manat kepik kepiks manat 0.01
Azores escudo escudos Portuguese Esc centavo centavos Esc 0.01
Bahamas, The dollar dollars Bahamian B$ cent cents B$0.01
Bahrain dinar dinars Bahrain BD fils fils BD 0.001
Bangladesh taka taka Bangladesh Tk poisha poisha Tk 0.01
Barbados dollar dollars Barbados BDS$ cent cents BDS$0.01
Belarus rubel rubels Belarusian Rbl – – –
Belgium euroa euros – € cent cents €0.01
Belize dollar dollars Belize BZ$ cent cents BZ$0.01
Benin franc francs CFA CFAF centimed centimes CFAF 0.01
Bermuda dollar dollars Bermuda Ber$ cent cents Ber$0.01
Bhutan ngultrum ngultrum Bhutanese Nu chhetrum chhetrum Nu 0.01
Bolivia boliviano bolivianos – Bs centavo centavos Bs 0.01
Bosnia and Herzegovina convertible convertible – KM pfening pfeninga KM 0.01
marka marka
Botswana pula pula Botswana P thebe thebe P 0.01
Brazil reale reais Brazilian R$ centavo centavos R$0.01
British Virgin Islands dollar dollars US $ or US$ b
cent cents $0.01
Brunei Darussalam dollar dollars Brunei B$ cent cents B$0.01
Bulgaria lev leva Bulgarian lev stotinka stotinki Lev 0.01
Burkina Faso franc francs CFA CFAF centime d
centimes CFAF 0.01
Burundi franc francs Burundi FBu centime centimes FBu 0.01
Cabo Verde escudo escudos Cape Verde CVEsc centavo centavos CVEsc 0.01

134 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


CURRENCY UNITS SUBSIDIARY UNITS
Country, economy, Value in terms
or area Singular Plural Adjective Abbreviation Singular Plural of main currency
Cambodia riel riels Cambodian CR sen sen CR 0.01
Cameroon franc francs CFA CFAF centimed centimes CFAF 0.01
Canada dollar dollars Canadian Can$ cent cents Can$0.01
Canary Islands peseta pesetas Spanish Ptas f
céntimo céntimos Pta 0.01
Cayman Islands dollar dollars Cayman Islands C$ cent cents C$0.01
Central African Republic franc francs CFA CFAF centimed centimes CFAF 0.01
Chad franc francs CFA CFAF centime d
centimes CFAF 0.01
Chile peso pesos Chilean Ch$ centavo centavos Ch$0.01
China yuang yuang Chinese ¥ fenh fen ¥ 0.01
Colombia peso pesos Colombian Col$ centavo centavos Col$0.01
Comoros franc francs Comorian CF centime centimes CF 0.01
Congo, Dem. Rep. franc francs Congo CGF centime centimes CGF 0.01
Congo, Rep. franc francs CFA CFAF centime d
centimes CFAF 0.01
Cook Islands dollar dollars New Zealand $NZ cent cents $NZ 0.01
Costa Rica colón colones Costa Rican C céntimo céntimos C 0.01
Côte d’Ivoire franc francs CFA CFAF centime d
centimes CFAF 0.01
Croatia kuna kunas Croatian HRK lipa lipa HRK 0.01
Cuba peso pesos Cuban $ centavo centavos $0.01
Curaçao guilder guilders Antillean ANG cent cents ANG 0.01
Cyprus euroa euros – € cent cents €0.01
Czech Republic koruna koruny Czech CZK haléř halér̆e CZK 0.01
Denmark krone kroner Danish DKr øre øre DKr 0.01
Djibouti franc francs Djibouti DF centime centimes DF 0.01
Dominica dollar dollars East Caribbean EC$ cent cents EC$0.01
Dominican Republic peso pesos Dominican RD$ centavo centavos RD$0.01
Ecuador dollar dollars US $ or US$b centavo centavos $0.01
Egypt, Arab Rep. pound pounds Egyptian LE piastrei piastres LE 0.01
El Salvador dollar j
dollars j
US $ or US$ b
cent cents $0.01
Equatorial Guinea franc francs CFA CFAF centimed centimes CFAF 0.01
Eritrea nakfa nakfa Eritrean ERN cent cents ERN 0.01
Estonia euro a
euros – € cent cents €0.01
Eswatini lilangeni emalangeni Eswatini E cent cents E 0.01
Ethiopia birr birr Ethiopian Br cent cents Br 0.01
Faeroe Islands krone kroner Danish DKr øre øre DKr 0.01
Falkland Islands pound pounds Falkland £ new penny new pence £0.01
Fiji dollar dollars Fiji F$ cent cents F$0.01
Finland euro a
euros – € cent cents €0.01
France euroa euros – € cent cents €0.01
French Guiana euroa euros – € cent cents €0.01
French Polynesia franc francs CFP CFPF centime centimes CFPF 0.01
Gabon franc francs CFA CFAF centimed centimes CFAF 0.01
Gambia, The dalasi dalasis Gambian D butut bututs D 0.01
Georgia lari lari Georgian GEL tetri tetri GEL 0.01
Germany euroa euros – € cent cents €0.01
Ghana cedi cedis Ghanaian ₵ pesewa pesewas ₵0.01

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 135


CURRENCY UNITS SUBSIDIARY UNITS
Country, economy, Value in terms
or area Singular Plural Adjective Abbreviation Singular Plural of main currency
Gibraltar pound pounds Gibraltar £ new penny new pence £0.01
Greece euroa euros – € cent cents €0.01
Greenland krone kroner Danish DKr øre øre DKr 0.01
Grenada dollar dollars East Caribbean EC$ cent cents EC$0.01
Guadeloupe euroa euros – € cent cents €0.01
Guam dollar dollars US $ or US$b cent cents US$0.01
Guatemala quetzal quetzales Guatemalan Q centavo centavos Q 0.01
Guernsey pound pounds Guernsey £ penny pence £0.01
Guinea franc francs Guinean GF – – –
Guinea Bissau franc francs CFA CFAF centime d
centimes CFAF 0.01
Guyana dollar dollars Guyanese G$ cent cents G$0.01
Haiti gourde gourdes Haitian G centime centimes G 0.01
Holy See euro euros – € cent cents €0.01
Honduras lempira lempiras Honduran L centavo centavos L 0.01
Hong Kong SAR, China dollar dollars Hong Kong HK$ cent cents HK$0.01
Hungary forint forint Hungarian Ft fillér fillér Ft 0.01
Iceland króna krónur Icelandic ISK eyrir aurar ISK 0.01
India rupee rupees Indian Rsj paisa paise Re 0.01
Indonesia rupiah rupiah Indonesian Rp sen sen Rp 0.01
Iran, Islamic Rep. rial rials Iranian Rlsk – – –
Iraq dinar dinars Iraqi ID fils fils ID 0.001
Ireland euro a
euros – € cent cents €0.01
Isle of Man pound pounds Manx £ penny pence £0.01
Israel new shekel new shkalim Israeli NIS agora agorot NIS 0.01
Italy euro a
euros – € cent cents €0.01
Jamaica dollar dollars Jamaica J$ cent cents J$0.01
Japan yen yen Japanese ¥ sen sen ¥0.01
Jersey pound pounds Jersey £ penny pence £0.01
Jordan dinar dinars Jordanian JD fils fils JD 0.001
Kazakhstan tenge tenge Kazakhstani T tiyn tiyns T 0.01
Kenya shilling shillings Kenya K Sh cent cents K Sh 0.01
Kiribati dollar dollars Australian $A cent cents $A 0.01
Korea, Dem. won won Korean Democratic – chun chun won 0.01
­People’s Rep. Peoples’ Republic
Korea, Rep. won won Korean W
= chun chun W
= 0.01
Kosovo euro a
euros – € cent cent €0.01
Kuwait dinar dinars Kuwaiti KD fils fils KD 0.001
Kyrgyz Republic som soms Kyrgyz som tyiyn tyiyns som 0.01
Lao PDR kip kip Lao KN – – –
Latvia euroa euros – € cent cent €0.01
Lebanon pound pounds Lebanese LL – – –
Lesotho loti l
maloti Lesotho M sente lisente M 0.01
Liberia dollar dollars Liberian $ cent cents $0.01
Libya dinar dinars Libyan LD dirham dirhams LD 0.001
Liechtenstein franc francs Swiss Sw F centime centimes Sw F 0.01
Lithuania euroa euros – € cent cents €0.01

136 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


CURRENCY UNITS SUBSIDIARY UNITS
Country, economy, Value in terms
or area Singular Plural Adjective Abbreviation Singular Plural of main currency
Luxembourg euroa euros – € cent cents €0.01
Macao SAR, China pataca patacas Macao P avo avos P 0.01
Madagascar ariary ariary Malagasy FMG iraimbilanja iraimbilanja FMG 0.20
Madeira escudo escudos Portuguese Esc centavo centavos Esc 0.01
Malawi kwacha kwacha Malawian MK tambala tambala MK 0.01
Malaysia ringgit ringgit Malaysian RM sen sen RM 0.01
Maldives rufiyaa rufiyaa Maldivian Rf laari laari Rf 0.01
Mali franc francs CFA CFAF centimed centimes CFAF 0.01
Malta euroa euros – € cent cents €0.01
Marshall Islands dollar dollars US $ or US$ b
cent cents $0.01
Martinique euroa euros – € cent cents €0.01
Mauritania ouguiyam ouguiyasm Mauritanian UM khoum khoums UM 0.20n
Mauritius rupee rupees Mauritian MUR cent cents MUR 0.01
Mayotte euro euros – € cent cents €0.01
Mexico peso pesos Mexican Mex$ centavo centavos Mex$0.01
Micronesia, Fed. States dollar dollars US $ or US$ b
cent cents $0.01
Moldova leu lei Moldovan MDL ban bani MDL 0.01
Monaco euroa euros – € cent cents €0.01
Mongolia tughrik tughriks Mongolian Tog möngö möngö Tog 0.01
Montenegro euroa euros – € cent cents €0.01
Montserrat dollar dollars East Caribbean EC$ cent cents EC$0.01
Morocco dirham dirhams Moroccan DH centime centimes DH 0.01
Mozambique metical meticais Mozambican Mt centavo centavos Mt 0.01
Myanmar kyat kyats Myanmar K pya pyas K 0.01
Namibia dollar dollars Namibian N$ cent cents N$0.01
Nauru dollar dollars Australian $A cent cents $A 0.01
Nepal rupee rupees Nepalese Nr paisa paisa NPR 0.01
Netherlands euroa euros – € cent cents €0.01
Netherlands Antilles guilder guilders Netherlands Antillean NA f. cent cents NA f. 0.01
New Caledonia franc francs CFP CFPF centime centimes CFPF 0.01
New Zealand dollar dollars New Zealand $NZ cent cents $NZ 0.01
Nicaragua córdoba córdobas Nicaraguan C$ centavo centavos C$0.01
Niger franc francs CFA CFAF centimed centimes CFAF 0.01
Nigeria naira naira Nigerian N kobo kobo N0.01
Niue dollar dollars New Zealand $NZ cent cents $NZ 0.01
Norfolk Island dollar dollars Australian $A cent cents $A 0.01
North Macedonia denar denars Macedonian MDen deni deni MDen 0.01
Northern Marianas Islands dollar dollars US $ or US$b cent cents $0.01
Norway krone kroner Norwegian NKr øre øre NKr 0.01
Oman rial rials Omani RO baisa baisas RO 0.001
Pakistan rupee rupees Pakistan PRso paisa paisas PRe 0.01
Palau dollar dollars US $ or US$b cent cents $0.01
Panama balboa balboas Panamanian B céntimo céntimos B 0.01
Papua New Guinea kina kina Papua New Guinea K toea toea K 0.01
Paraguay guaraní guaraníes Paraguayan G céntimo céntimos G0.01

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 137


CURRENCY UNITS SUBSIDIARY UNITS
Country, economy, Value in terms
or area Singular Plural Adjective Abbreviation Singular Plural of main currency
Peru sol soles Peruvian S/. céntimo céntimos S/. 0.01
Philippines peso pesos Philippine P= centavo centavos =0.01
P
Pitcairn Islands dollar dollars New Zealand $NZ cent cents $NZ 0.01
Poland zloty zlotys Polish Zl grosz groszy Zl 0.01
Portugal eurod euros – € cent cents €0.01
Puerto Rico dollar dollars US $ or US$b cent cents $0.01
Qatar riyal riyals Qatari QR dirham dirhams QR 0.01
Réunion euroa euros – € cent cents €0.01
Romania new leu leip Romanian leu – – –
Russian Federation ruble rubles Russian Rub kopek kopeks Rub 0.01
Rwanda franc francs Rwanda RF centime centimes RF 0.01
Samoa tala tala Samoa SAT sene sene SAT 0.01
San Marino euro a
euros – € cent cents €0.01
São Tomé and Príncipe dobra dobras São Tomé and Príncipe Db centimo centimos Db 0.01
Saudi Arabia riyal riyals Saudi Arabian SRlsq halala halalas SRl 0.01
Senegal franc francs CFA CFAF centimed centimes CFAF 0.01
Serbia dinar dinars Serbian SRD para para SRD 0.01
Seychelles rupee rupees Seychelles SR cent cents SR 0.01
Sierra Leone leone leones Sierra Leonean Le cent cents Le 0.01
Singapore dollar dollars Singapore S$ cent cents S$0.01
Sint Maarten guilder guilders Antillean ANG cent cents ANG 0.01
Slovak Republic euro a
euros – € cent cents €0.01
Slovenia euroa euros – € cent cents €0.01
Solomon Islands dollar dollars Solomon Islands SI$ cent cents SI$0.01
Somalia shilling shillings Somali So. Sh. cent cents So. Sh. 0.01
South Africa rand rand South African R cent cents R 0.01
South Sudan pound pounds South Sudanese £ piastrei piastres £0.01
Spain euroa euros – € cent cents €0.01
Sri Lanka rupee rupees Sri Lanka SL Rsr cent cents SL Re 0.01
St. Helena pounds poundss sterlings £ or £ stg.s new penny new pence £0.01
St. Kitts and Nevis dollar dollars East Caribbean EC$ cent cents EC$0.01
St. Lucia dollar dollars East Caribbean EC$ cent cents EC$0.01
St. Pierre and Miquelon euroa euros – € cent cents €0.01
St. Vincent and the dollar dollars East Caribbean EC$ cent cents EC$0.01
Grenadines
Sudan pound pound Sudanese SD piastrei piastres SD 0.01
Suriname dollar dollars Suriname SRD cent cents SRD 0.01
Svalbard and krone kroner Norwegian NKr øre øre NKr 0.01
Jan Mayen Islands
Sweden krona kronor Swedish SKr öre öre SKr 0.01
Switzerland franc francs Swiss Sw F centime centimes Sw F 0.01
Syrian Arab Republic pound pounds Syrian LS piastre i
piastres LS 0.01
Taiwan, China dollar dollars New Taiwan NT$ fent fen NT$0.01
Tajikistan somoni somoni Tajik SM diram dirams SM 0.01
Tanzania shilling shillings Tanzania T Sh cent cents T Sh 0.01
Thailand baht baht Thai B satang satang B 0.01

138 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


CURRENCY UNITS SUBSIDIARY UNITS
Country, economy, Value in terms
or area Singular Plural Adjective Abbreviation Singular Plural of main currency
Timor-Leste dollar dollars US $ or US$b cent cents $0.01
Togo franc francs CFA CFAF centimed centimes CFAF 0.01
Tokelau dollar dollars New Zealand $NZ cent cents $NZ 0.01
Tonga pa’anga pa’anga Tongan T$ seniti seniti T$0.01
Trinidad and Tobago dollar dollars Trinidadian TT$ cent cents TT$0.01
Tunisia dinar dinars Tunisian TD millime millimes TD 0.001
Turkey lira liras Turkish TRY kurus kurus TRY 0.01
Turkmenistan manat manat Turkmen manat tenge tenge manat 0.01
Turks and Caicos Islands dollar dollars US $ or US$b cent cents $0.01
Tuvalu dollar dollars Australian $A cent cents $A 0.01
Uganda shilling shillings Uganda U Sh cent cents U Sh 0.01
Ukraine hryvnia hryvnias Ukrainian Hrv kopiyka kopiyky Hrv 0.01
United Arab Emirates dirham dirhams Emirati Dh fils fils Dh 0.01
United Kingdom pounds poundss British £ or £ stg.s penny pence £0.01
United States dollar dollars US $ or US$b cent cents $0.01
United States Virgin dollar dollars US $ or US$ b
cent cents $0.01
Islands
Uruguay peso pesos Uruguayan Ur$ centésimo centésimos Ur$0.01
Uzbekistan som som Uzbek UBZ tiyin tiyin UBZ 0.01
Vanuatu vatu vatu Vanuatu VT – – –
Venezuela, RB bolívar bolívares Venezuelan Bs centavo centavos Bs 0.01
Vietnam dong dong Vietnamese D – – –
Wallis and Futuna Islands franc francs CFP CFPF centime centimes CFPF 0.01
West Bank and Gaza new shekel new shkalim Israeli NIS agora agorot NIS 0.01
Yemen, Republic of rial rial Yemeni YRlsu fils fils YRl 0.01
Zambia kwacha kwacha Zambian K ngwee ngwee K 0.01
Zimbabwe dollar dollars Zimbabwe Z$ cent cents Z$0.01
a. Use the term euro area, not euro zone. It is incorrect to refer to the euro by nationality, for example, as an Austrian euro or a Belgian euro. However, one
may refer to a country’s holdings of euros, for example, euro (France) or euro (Germany). Use the euro symbol (€) for publications.
b. Use US$ instead of $ when it is not clear that the reference is to the US dollar.
c. The French franc and the Spanish peseta as legal tender in Andorra have been replaced by the euro.
d. There is no subsidiary unit issued for the CFA franc. However, it is useful to retain the concept of the centime.
e. The word real should be italicized to avoid confusion in such phrases as “the real’s real exchange rate.”
f. Singular: Pta. Plural: Ptas.
g. The currency is the renminbi, while the currency unit is the yuan.
h. Second subsidiary currency unit: jiao; 10 fen = 1 jiao; 10 jiao = 1 yuan.
i. Second subsidiary currency: millième; 10 millièmes = 1 piastre.
j. Singular: Re. Plural: Rs.
k. Singular: Rl. Plural: Rls.
l. The loti is interchangeable with the South African rand, which remains legal tender.
m. In French, the singular and plural are the same; in Arabic and English the plural form is used.
n. For accounting purposes, the ouguiya is also divided into the dixième (= UM 0.10) and the centième (= UM 0.01).
o. Singular: Pre. Plural: Prs.
p. Use the plural form lei before a figure (lei 100).
q. Singular: SRl. Plural: SRls.
r. Singular: SL Re. Plural: SL Rs.
s. Sterling is at times used in place of pounds. When used as an adjective to describe the currency, sterling follows pounds (that is, pounds sterling).
t. Second subsidiary currency: chiao; 10 fen = 1 chiao.
u. Singular: YRl. Plural: YRls.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 139


A P P E N D I X E  
COMMON A B B R E V I AT I O N S

ADB Asian Development Bank


ADF African Development Fund
AFD Agence Française de Développement
AfDB African Development Bank
AFR Africa (World Bank regional vice presidency)
AIDS acquired immune deficiency syndrome
AMSCO African Management Services Company
ANM auxiliary nurse midwife
APDF Africa Project Development Facility
APEC Asia-Pacific Economic Cooperation
ARAG AIDS Regional Advisory Group for the Eastern Mediterranean
ASEAN Association of Southeast Asian Nations
AU African Union
Bank World Bank
BCEAO Banque Centrale des États de l’Afrique de l’Ouest
BEEPS Business Environment and Enterprise Performance Survey
BIS Bank for International Settlements
BPO business process outsourcing
BRICS Brazil, Russian Federation, India, China, South Africa
CAS country assistance strategy
CBO community-based organization
CDC Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (US)
CDD community-driven development
CEM Country Economic Memorandum
CFC chlorofluorocarbon
CGAP Consultative Group to Assist the Poor
CGIAR Consultative Group on International Agricultural Research
CIDA Canadian International Development Agency
CIF or c.i.f. cost, insurance, and freight
CIS Commonwealth of Independent States
CMU Country Management Unit
COPD chronic obstructive pulmonary disease
CPI consumer price index
CRS Creditor Reporting System (of the OECD)
CSO civil society organization
CTD Division of Control of Tropical Diseases (of the WHO)
DAC Development Assistance Committee (of the OECD)

140 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


DALY disability-adjusted life year
DANIDA Danish International Development Agency
DDSR debt and debt-service reduction
DEC Development Economics Vice Presidency (of the World Bank)
DECDG Development Economics Data Group (of the World Bank)
DECPG Development Economics Development Prospects Group (of the World Bank)
DECRG Development Economics Research Group (of the World Bank)
DFID Department for International Development (UK)
DOTS directly observed treatment, short course (for tuberculosis)
DPT diphtheria, pertussis, and tetanus (vaccine)
DRE debt reduction equivalent
DRF Debt Reduction Facility (of the IDA)
DRS Debtor Reporting System (of the World Bank)
EAP East Asia and Pacific (World Bank regional vice presidency)
EBRD European Bank for Reconstruction and Development
ECA Economic Commission for Africa (of the UN) or Europe and Central Asia (World Bank
regional vice presidency)
ECB European Central Bank
ECLAC Economic Commission for Latin America and the Caribbean (of the UN)
ECOWAS Economic Community of West African States
EDA effective development assistance
EFA Education for All
EMRO Eastern Mediterranean Regional Office (of the WHO)
EMS European Monetary System
EMU European Monetary Union
EPI Expanded Program on Immunization
ESAC Economic and Social Adjustment Credit or Education Sector Adjustment Credit or Energy
Sector Adjustment Credit (all of the World Bank)
ESAF Enhanced Structural Adjustment Facility (of the IMF)
ESCAP Economic and Social Commission for Asia and the Pacific (of the UN)
ESW economic and sector work
EU European Union
EU-15 the 15 countries that were members of the EU before May 1, 2004
FACS Firm Analysis and Competitiveness Survey
FAO Food and Agriculture Organization (of the UN)
FBO faith-based organization
FCS fragile and conflict-affected situations
FCV fragility, conflict, and violence
FDI foreign direct investment
FOB or f.o.b. free on board
FOIA Freedom of Information Act
FSAL financial sector adjustment loan
FSAP Financial Sector Assessment Program
FSU former Soviet Union
FTA free trade agreement
FTI Fast-Track Initiative (of EFA)

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 141


FTZ free trade zone
Fund International Monetary Fund
G-7 Group of Seven
G-8 Group of Eight
GAIN Global Alliance for Improved Nutrition
GATS General Agreement on Trade in Services
GATT General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade
GCC Gulf Cooperation Council
GDP gross domestic product
GEF Global Environment Facility
GER gross enrollment ratio
GFD Global Financial Development (World Bank database)
GHG greenhouse gas
GIS geographic information system
GIZ German Agency for International Cooperation (Deutsche Gesellschaft für Internationale
Zusammenarbeit) (replaced GTZ)
GNI gross national income
GNP gross national product
GNP/c gross national product per capita
GPS Global Positioning System
GRSP Global Road Safety Partnership
GSP generalized system of preferences
GTZ German Agency for Technical Cooperation (Deutsche Gesellschaft für Technische
Zusammenarbeit) (replaced by GIZ)
GVIO gross value of industrial output
GW gigawatt
HepB hepatitis B vaccine
Hib Haemophilus influenzae type B
HIPC heavily indebted poor countries
HIPC Initiative Heavily Indebted Poor Countries Initiative
HIV human immunodeficiency virus
HNP Health, Nutrition, and Population (sector of the World Bank)
IBRD International Bank for Reconstruction and Development (of the World Bank Group)
ICD International Classification of Diseases
ICO integrated community organization
ICOR incremental capital-output ratio
ICSID International Centre for Settlement of Investment Disputes (of the World Bank Group)
ICT information and communication technology
IDA International Development Association (of the World Bank Group)
IDA13 13th Replenishment of IDA
IDB Inter-American Development Bank
IDU injecting drug user
IEC information, education, and communication
IF Integrated Framework for Trade-Related Technical Assistance to Least
Developed Countries
IFAD International Fund for Agricultural Development
IFC International Finance Corporation (of the World Bank Group)

142 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


IFI international financial institution
IFPRI International Food Policy Research Institute
IFSP Integrated Food Security Program
ILO International Labour Organization (plenary body) or International Labour Office (the
secretariat and publisher)
IMCI integrated management of childhood illness
IMF International Monetary Fund
IMR infant mortality rate
IOM International Organization for Migration
I-PRSP interim PRSP
IT information technology
ITD International Tax Dialogue
JICA Japan International Cooperation Agency
KAP knowledge, attitudes, and practices
kph kilometers per hour
kWh kilowatt-hour
LAC Latin America and the Caribbean (World Bank regional vice presidency)
LDOD total long-term debt outstanding and disbursed
LIBOR London interbank offered rate
LLI local-level institution
LSA livelihood support activities
M&A mergers and acquisitions
M&E monitoring and evaluation
MCH maternal and child health
MDB multilateral development bank
MDGs Millennium Development Goals
Mercosur Southern Cone Common Market (Mercado Común del Sur)
MFI microfinance institution
MFD Maximizing Finance for Development
MIGA Multilateral Investment Guarantee Agency (of the World Bank Group)
MIS management information system
MMR maternal mortality ratio
MNA or MENA Middle East and North Africa (World Bank regional vice presidency)
MNC multinational corporation
mph miles per hour
MRY most recent year
MSM men who have sex with men
MTCT mother-to-child transmission
MW megawatt
MYRA multiyear rescheduling agreement
n.a. not applicable
NAFTA North American Free Trade Agreement
NATO North Atlantic Treaty Organization
NCD noncommunicable disease
NEPAD New Partnership for Africa’s Development
NGO nongovernmental organization
NIC newly industrialized country
NIE newly industrialized economy

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 143


NIH National Institutes of Health
NIS newly independent state
NPV net present value
NRM natural resource management
O&M operation and maintenance
OAS Organization of American States
OAU Organization of African Unity
ODA official development assistance
ODF official development finance
OECD Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development
OED Operations Evaluation Department (World Bank)
OLS ordinary least squares
OOPP objective-oriented project planning
OPEC Organization of the Petroleum Exporting Countries
OPV oral polio vaccine
OVC orphans and vulnerable children
OVI objectively verifiable indicator
Oxfam International an assistance organization (no need to spell out)
PAD project appraisal document
PAHO Pan American Health Organization
PAYG pay as you go
PEAP Poverty Eradication Action Plan
PETS Public Expenditure Tracking Survey
PFP Policy Framework Paper
PICS Public Information Centers and Services
PME participatory monitoring and evaluation
PNA participatory needs assessment
PPA participatory poverty assessment
PPP purchasing power parity or public-private partnership
PRA participatory rural appraisal
PREM Poverty Reduction and Economic Management (World Bank network vice presidency)
PRS poverty reduction strategy
PRSC Poverty Reduction Support Credit
PRSP Poverty Reduction Strategy Paper
PTR pupil-teacher ratio
R&D research and development
RDS rural development society
REER real effective exchange rate
RPED Regional Program on Enterprise Development
RTI reproductive tract infection
RWSS rural water supply and sanitation
SAAR seasonally adjusted annual rate
SAC Structural Adjustment Credit
SAF Structural Adjustment Facility (of the IMF)
SAR South Asia (World Bank regional vice presidency)
SDRs special drawing rights

144 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


Sida Swedish International Development Cooperation Agency
SIDS small island developing states
SMEs small and medium enterprises
SOE state-owned enterprise
STD sexually transmitted disease
STEM science, technology, engineering, and mathematics
STI sexually transmitted infection
SWAP sectorwide approach
SWOT strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, threats (analysis)
TA technical assistance
TBA traditional birth attendant
TFR total fertility rate
TRIPS Trade-Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Rights
U5MR under-five mortality rate
UHC universal health coverage
UN United Nations
UNAIDS Joint United Nations Programme on HIV/AIDS
UNCTAD United Nations Conference on Trade and Development
UNDP United Nations Development Programme
UNECA United Nations Economic Commission for Africa
UNEP United Nations Environment Programme
UNESCO United Nations Educational, Scientific, and Cultural Organization
UNFPA United Nations Population Fund
UNHCR United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees
UNICEF United Nations Children’s Fund
UNIDO United Nations Industrial Development Organization
UNIFEM United Nations Development Fund for Women
UNODCCP United Nations Office for Drug Control and Crime Prevention
UNRWA United Nations Relief and Works Agency for Palestine Refugees in the
Near East
USAID United States Agency for International Development
VAT value added tax
VCT voluntary counseling and testing
VDP village development plan
VPU Vice Presidential Unit
WAEMU West African Economic and Monetary Union
WAMU West African Monetary Union
WBES World Business Environment Survey
WBG World Bank Group
WBI World Bank Institute
WDI World Development Indicators (World Bank publication)
WDR World Development Report (World Bank publication)
WFP World Food Programme
WHO World Health Organization
WPI wholesale price index
WTO World Trade Organization

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 145


A P P E N D I X F  
NAMES AND TERMS

19th Replenishment of IDA (IDA19)


acknowledgment not acknowledgement
acquired immune deficiency syndrome (AIDS)
adviser not advisor
advisory
Africa (World Bank regional vice presidency; AFR)
Africa Project Development Facility (APDF)
African Development Bank (AfDB)
African Development Fund (ADF)
African Management Services Company (AMSCO)
African Union (AU)
Agence française de développement (AFD)
ages not aged, for example, children ages 10 and older
agreed-on (adj) agreed-on price; but the price that was agreed on
AIDS Regional Advisory Group for the Eastern Mediterranean (ARAG)
anti- (prefix) (no hyphen)
anti-money-laundering (adj) anti-money-laundering initiatives
appendixes not appendices
around Try about, approximately. Around should usually be restricted to
mean physically near.
as Try because. It is often not clear whether as means causation or
coincidence.
Asian Development Bank (ADB)
Asia-Pacific Economic Cooperation (APEC)
Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN)
assure Distinguish between assure, ensure, and insure.
at-risk (adj) at-risk projects; but projects that are at risk
auxiliary nurse midwife (ANM)
balance of payments (adj; n)
Bank for International Settlements (BIS)
Bank-Fund; but World Bank–International Monetary Fund (adj) Bank-Fund Annual Meetings; Joint World Bank–International
Monetary Fund Annual Meetings
Bank–United Nations; but Bank-UN (adj) Bank–United Nations partnership; Bank-UN partnership
Bank-wide Bank-wide review
Banque Centrale des États de l’Afrique de l’Ouest (BCEAO)
base-year (adj)
best-practice (adj); best practice (n) best-practice policies; industry best practices
between Use between for one-to-one relationships regardless of the
number of items (for example, “NAFTA is a treaty between
Canada, Mexico, and the United States.”). Use among to express
a relationship of an item to many surrounding items collectively.
birthrate (n)

146 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


birthweight
Board of Executive Directors (World Bank); the Board
breakdown (n), break down (v)
breakup (n), break up (v)
breastfeed (v)
buildup (n), build up (v)
Business Environment and Enterprise Performance Survey (BEEPS)
business process outsourcing (BPO)
by-product
Canadian International Development Agency (CIDA)
capacity-building (adj); capacity building (n) capacity-building initiatives; capacity building is essential
Caribbean
case-by-case (adj)
caseload
Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC)
central bank Lowercase unless part of a proper name.
cesarean section
checkup (n), check up (v)
childbearing (n, adj)
childcare
chlorofluorocarbon (CFC)
chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD)
civil service (n, adj)
civil society (n, adj)
civil society organization (CSO)
client-provider interaction
co- (prefix) (no hyphen)
cofounder
cofinancing
cogeneration
co-invest
co-investment
co-investor
Cold War
Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS)
community-based organization (CBO)
community-driven (adj) community-driven project; but the project was community driven
community-driven development (CDD)
compare to Try compare with. Compare to should be used only to note a
likeness; compare with to analyze similarities and differences.
completion-point (adj); completion point (n) completion-point status; the completion point
comprise A whole consists of, encircles, or comprises its parts; the parts com-
pose, constitute, or make up the whole. Never allow comprised of.
constitution; constitutional Lowercase, but US Constitution
Consultative Group on International Agricultural Research (CGIAR)
Consultative Group to Assist the Poor (CGAP)
consumer price index (CPI)
continual Distinguish between continual (means recurring often or at intervals
and refers only to time) and continuous (means uninterrupted or
unbroken and can refer to time or space).

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 147


contracting-out (n) The contracting-out of the work was beneficial.
cooperate
coordinate
cost, insurance, and freight (CIF or c.i.f.)
cost of living (n), cost-of-living (adj)
cost-effective (adj)
country assistance strategy (CAS)
Country Economic Memorandum (CEM)
Country Management Unit (CMU)
Creditor Reporting System (CRS) of the OECD
cross-cutting (adj) It is a cross-cutting issue.
cross-section (n)
cutoff (n), cut off (v), cut-off (adj)
Danish International Development Agency (DANIDA)
data data are, not data is
database
data set
day care (n), day-care (adj)
debt and debt-service reduction (DDSR)
Debtor Reporting System (DRS) of the World Bank
debt reduction equivalent (DRE)
Debt Reduction Facility (DRF) of the IDA
debt relief (n); debt-relief (adj) provide debt relief; debt-relief program
debt service (n); debt-service (adj); debt-servicing (adj) cost of debt service; debt-service reduction
decision-making (n); decision-making (adj); decision-maker (n) guidelines for decision-making; decision-making guidelines
Department for International Development (DFID), United Kingdom
Deutsche Gesellschaft für Internationale Zusammenarbeit Replaced GTZ
(German Agency for International Cooperation; GIZ)
Deutsche Gesellschaft für Technische Zusammenarbeit Replaced by GIZ
(German Agency for Technical Cooperation; GTZ)
developed country (n); developed-country (adj) developed-country financing
developing country This term is allowed, but the use of the World Bank income
classifications is preferred: low-income country (LIC); low- and
middle-income country (LMIC); and upper-middle-income country
(UMIC).
Development Assistance Committee (DAC) of the OECD
Development Economics Data Group (DECDG)
Development Economics Development Prospects Group (DECPG)
Development Economics Research Group (DECRG)
Development Economics Vice Presidency (DEC) of the World Bank
dialogue
diphtheria, pertussis, and tetanus (DPT) vaccine
directly observed treatment, short course (DOTS), for tuberculosis
disability-adjusted life year (DALY)
dispute-resolution (adj) dispute-resolution techniques
distance learning centers (but headline-style caps for specific ones)
distortionary
Division of Control of Tropical Diseases (CTD) of the WHO
drawdown (n)
dropout (n, adj), drop out (v)

148 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


due to When due to is used as an adverb, change to because of, caused
by, the result of, attributable to. Use due to only as an adjective:
The increase was due to higher taxes.
e.g. Change to for example.
East Asia and Pacific (World Bank regional vice presidency; EAP)
Eastern Mediterranean Regional Office (EMRO) of the WHO
economic and sector work (ESW)
Economic and Social Adjustment Credit (ESAC) of the World Bank
Economic and Social Commission for Asia and the Pacific (ESCAP)
of the UN
Economic Commission for Africa (ECA) of the UN
Economic Commission for Latin America and the Caribbean
(ECLAC) of the UN
Economic Community of West African States (ECOWAS)
economic sector (n, adj)
Education for All (EFA)
Education Sector Adjustment Credit (ESAC) of the World Bank
effective development assistance (EDA)
email
end use, end user
energy sector (n, adj)
Energy Sector Adjustment Credit (ESAC) of the World Bank
energy-efficient (adj)
Enhanced HIPC Initiative
Enhanced Structural Adjustment Facility (ESAF) of the IMF
ensure Distinguish among assure, ensure, and insure: assure people,
ensure events, insure things.
etc. Change to and so on, and so forth.
ethnic group not tribe
euro area not euro zone
European Bank for Reconstruction and Development (EBRD)
European Central Bank (ECB)
Europe and Central Asia (World Bank regional vice presidency; ECA)
European Monetary System (EMS)
European Monetary Union (EMU)
European Union (EU)
EU-15 The 15 countries that were members of the EU before the May 1,
2004, enlargement (Austria, Belgium, Denmark, Finland, France,
Germany, Greece, Ireland, Italy, Luxembourg, the Netherlands,
Portugal, Spain, Sweden, and the United Kingdom)
ex ante, ex post no italics
exchange rate (n, adj) exchange rate regimes
Expanded Program on Immunization (EPI)
ex-president Change to former president.
faith-based organization (FBO)
family planning (n, adj)
farmworker (n, adj)
farther Distinguish between farther (for physical distance) and further (for degree).
fast track (n), fast-track (adj)
Fast-Track Initiative (FTI) of EFA
fewer Use less with singular nouns (less salt); use fewer with plural nouns
and countable things (fewer calories).

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 149


fieldwork; fieldworker
financial sector (n, adj)
financial sector adjustment loan (FSAL)
Financial Sector Assessment Program (FSAP)
fine-tune (v); fine tuning (n)
Firm Analysis and Competitiveness Survey (FACS)
first-generation (adj)
firsthand
fiscal year
floodplain
flowchart
follow-up (n, adj), follow up (v)
Food and Agriculture Organization (FAO) of the UN
forego Distinguish between forego (go before) and forgo (abstain from)
foreign direct investment (FDI)
foreign exchange (adj)
formal sector (n, adj)
former Soviet Union (FSU)
for-profit
forums not fora
Freedom of Information Act (FOIA)
free market (n), free-market (adj)
free on board (FOB or f.o.b.)
free trade agreement (FTA)
free trade zone (FTZ)
front-line (adj) front-line activity
full Poverty Reduction Strategy Paper (full PRSP)
General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT) Succeeded by WTO; use GATT in historical contexts only.
General Agreement on Trade in Services (GATS)
generalized system of preferences (GSP)
German Agency for International Cooperation (Deutsche Replaced GTZ
Gesellschaft für Internationale Zusammenarbeit; GIZ)
German Agency for Technical Cooperation (Deutsche Replaced by GIZ
Gesellschaft für Technische Zusammenarbeit; GTZ)
Global Alliance for Improved Nutrition (GAIN)
Global Development Finance (GDF)
Global Environment Facility (GEF)
Global Road Safety Partnership (GRSP)
government Always lowercase (for example, the German government).
gray not grey
grassroots (n, adj) the grassroots of society; grassroots organizations.
gross domestic product (GDP)
gross enrollment ratio (GER)
gross national income (GNI)
gross national product (GNP)
gross national product per capita (GNP/c)
gross value of industrial output (GVIO)
groundwater
Group of Eight (G-8) (n, adj) Group of Eight countries; G-8 countries (Canada, France, Germany,
Italy, Japan, the Russian Federation, the United Kingdom, and the
United States)
150 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020
Group of Seven (G-7) (n, adj) Group of Seven countries; G-7 countries (Canada, France, Germany,
Italy, Japan, the United Kingdom, and the United States)
Gulf Cooperation Council (GCC)
Haemophilus influenzae type B (Hib)
handmade
handout (n, adj), hand out (v)
hard copy (n), hardcopy (adj)
hardline (adj), hard-liner (n)
health care (n, adj) health care industry; the state of health care
Health, Nutrition, and Population (World Bank sector; HNP)
heavily indebted poor countries (HIPC)
Heavily Indebted Poor Countries (HIPC) Initiative
hepatitis B vaccine (HepB)
human immunodeficiency virus (HIV)
i.e. Change to that is.
IDA-only (adj) IDA-only countries
if Distinguish between if (to convey conditionality) and whether
(to convey choice)
impact (v) Change to affect, influence, or have an effect on.
incremental capital-output ratio (ICOR)
independently of Change to independent of.
in depth (adv), in-depth (adj)
indexes not indices
industrial countries not industrialized countries
infant mortality rate (IMR)
informal sector (n, adj)
information and communication technology (ICT)
information, education, and communication (IEC)
information technology (IT)
injecting drug user (IDU)
inner city (n), inner-city (adj)
in-service education
integrated community organization (ICO)
Integrated Food Security Program (IFSP)
Integrated Framework for Trade-Related Technical
Assistance to Least Developed Countries (IF)
integrated management of childhood illness (IMCI)
inter alia Change to among other things, among others.
Inter-American Development Bank (IDB)
interest rate (n, adj)
interim Poverty Reduction Strategy Paper (I-PRSP)
International Bank for Reconstruction and Development
(IBRD) of the World Bank Group
International Centre for Settlement of Investment Disputes
(ICSID) of the World Bank Group
International Classification of Diseases (ICD)
International Development Association (IDA) of the World
Bank Group
International Finance Corporation (IFC) of the World Bank Group IFC, not the IFC.
international financial institution (IFI)
International Food Policy Research Institute (IFPRI)

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 151


International Fund for Agricultural Development (IFAD)
International Labour Organization (plenary body) or International
Labour Office (secretariat and publisher) (ILO)
International Monetary Fund (IMF, the Fund)
International Organization for Migration (IOM)
International Tax Dialogue (ITD)
internet
intranet
Japan International Cooperation Agency (JICA)
Joint United Nations Programme on HIV/AIDS (UNAIDS)
judgment not judgement
kilometers per hour (kph)
knowledge, attitudes, and practices (KAP)
knowledge-sharing (adj); knowledge sharing (n) knowledge-sharing activities; engage in knowledge sharing
landholder
landmine
landowner
Latin America and the Caribbean (World Bank regional vice
presidency; LAC)
layoff (n), lay off (v)
left wing (n), left-wing (adj)
level the playing field avoid overuse
life cycle (n), life-cycle (adj)
lifestyle
link (n) not linkage
livelihood support activities (LSA)
local-level (adj) local-level feedback
local-level institution (LLI)
London interbank offered rate (LIBOR)
long term (n), long-term (adj) in the long term; long-term forecast, but the forecast is long term
longtime (adj)
long-standing (adj)
lower-middle-income (adj)
low income (n), low-income (adj)
macroeconomic
male-female ratio
management information system (MIS)
manmade Change to artificial or constructed.
maternal and child health (MCH)
maternal mortality ratio (MMR)
Mediterranean
men who have sex with men (MSM)
mergers and acquisitions (M&A)
micro- (prefix) (no hyphen) microenterprise, microlending
microfinance institution (MFI)
middle age (n), middle-aged (adj)
middle class (n), middle-class (adj)
Middle East and North Africa (World Bank regional
vice presidency; MNA or MENA)
middle-income (adj) middle-income countries

152 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


miles per hour (mph)
Millennium Development Goals (MDGs)
monitoring and evaluation (M&E)
more importantly Change to more important.
most recent year (MRY)
mother-to-child transmission (MTCT)
multi- (prefix) (no hyphen) multisectoral, multidonor
multilateral development bank (MDB)
Multilateral Investment Guarantee Agency (MIGA) of the MIGA, not the MIGA
World Bank Group
multinational corporation (MNC)
multiyear rescheduling agreement (MYRA)
Muslim not Moslem
National Institutes of Health (NIH)
nation building (n), nation-building (adj)
nationwide
natural resource management (NRM)
neonatal; neonate
net present value (NPV)
newly independent state (NIS)
newly industrialized country (NIC)
newly industrialized economy (NIE)
New Partnership for Africa’s Development (NEPAD)
non- (prefix) (no hyphen) noncorrupt, noncrisis, nonexistent, nonlending
noncommunicable disease (NCD)
nongovernmental organization (NGO)
non-oil-exporting (adj) non-oil-exporting country
North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA)
North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO)
objectively verifiable indicator (OVI)
objective-oriented project planning (OOPP)
official development assistance (ODA)
official development finance (ODF)
ordinary least squares (OLS)
one-stop shopping avoid overuse
ongoing (adj) ongoing investigation
onlending
online (adj, adv) online research; working online
on the ground avoid; try in the field
operation and maintenance (O&M)
Operations Evaluation Department (OED) of the World Bank
oral polio vaccine (OPV)
Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD)
Organization of African Unity (OAU) Succeeded by the African Union; use in historical contexts only.
Organization of American States (OAS)
Organization of the Petroleum Exporting Countries (OPEC)
orphans and vulnerable children (OVC)
outsource
over- (prefix) (no hyphen) overestimate, overenroll, overwork

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 153


Pan American Health Organization (PAHO)
participatory monitoring and evaluation (PME)
participatory needs assessment (PNA)
participatory poverty assessment (PPA)
participatory rural appraisal (PRA)
pay as you go (PAYG); pay-as-you-go (adj)
payoff (n), pay off (v)
per annum Change to a year or per year.
percent; percentage Use percent with defined numbers (“only 5 percent of the people
voted”). Use percentage with undefined quantities (“only a small
percentage of people voted”) and percentage points (“the tax
rate increased by 10 percentage points”).
phaseout (n); phase out (v) the program phaseout will occur; we will phase out the program
Policy Framework Paper (PFP)
policyholder
policy making (n); policy-making (adj); policy maker (n) an important role in policy making; policy-making guidelines;
a gathering of policy makers
post- (prefix) (no hyphen) postconflict, postreform, but post−World War II
Poverty Eradication Action Plan (PEAP)
poverty reduction (n, adj)
Poverty Reduction and Economic Management (World Bank
network vice presidency; PREM)
poverty reduction strategy (PRS)
Poverty Reduction Strategy Paper (PRSP)
Poverty Reduction Support Credit (PRSC)
pre- (prefix) (no hyphen) precrisis, prereform, prewar
preventive not preventative
primary-school-age (adj) primary-school-age children
private sector (n, adj) private sector involvement; in the private sector
problem solving (n); problem-solving (adj) engage in problem solving; problem-solving capacity
pro-development
project appraisal document (PAD)
pro-poor
Public Expenditure Tracking Survey (PETS)
public sector (n, adj) in the public sector; public sector involvement
pupil-teacher ratio (PTR)
quasi- (prefix) (use hyphen) quasi-professional, quasi-public
rain forest
rainwater
re- (prefix) (no hyphen) reassess, reestablish, rework
real effective exchange rate (REER)
Regional Program on Enterprise Development (RPED)
reproductive tract infection (RTI)
research and development (R&D)
right wing (n), right-wing (adj)
risk taker (n), risk taking (n), risk-taking (adj)
risk-bearing (adj) risk-bearing capacity
runoff (n), run off (v)
rural development society (RDS)
rural water supply and sanitation (RWSS)

154 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


safeguard (n, adj, v) safeguard policies
safety net (n, adj)
school-age (adj)
science, technology, engineering, and mathematics (STEM)
seasonally adjusted annual rate (SAAR)
sectorwide approach (SWAP)
sewerage Use sewerage, not sewage, when referring to infrastructure and
services.
sexually transmitted disease (STD)
sexually transmitted infection (STI)
short term (n); short-term (adj) in the short term; short-term prospects, but plans are short term
since Use because for causation if confusion with the temporal
meaning (“since last winter”) could occur.
-size (suffix), not -sized medium-size
small and medium enterprises (SMEs)
social sector (n, adj)
socioeconomic
sociopolitical
soft copy (n), soft-copy (adj)
South Asia (World Bank regional vice presidency; SAR)
Southern Cone Common Market (Mercado Común del Sur;
Mercosur)
special drawing rights (SDRs)
stand-alone (adj) stand-alone loans
start-up (n, adj), start up (v)
state-owned enterprise (SOE)
Strategic Compact
Strategic Directions Paper
strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, threats (SWOT) analysis
Structural Adjustment Credit (SAC)
Structural Adjustment Facility (SAF) of the IMF
sub- (prefix) (no hyphen) subcommittee, subdistrict, subregion
Sub-Saharan Africa
Swedish International Development Cooperation Authority (Sida)
take-off (n, adj); take off (v) the take-off point; the economy will take off
teacher-student ratio
technical assistance (TA)
terms-of-trade (adj); terms of trade (n)
that, which Distinguish between that (for restrictive clauses) and which (for
nonrestrictive clauses) (See Chicago 5.220.)
Third World Change to developing countries.
time frame
total fertility rate (TFR)
total long-term debt outstanding and disbursed (LDOD)
toward not towards
Trade-Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Rights (TRIPS)
traditional birth attendant (TBA)
transport 
Transport is preferred for goods, and transportation is preferred for
people; however, exceptions may apply and are permitted.
Tropical Disease Research Program
turnaround (n)

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 155


under- (prefix) (no hyphen) underestimate, underfinance, underregistration
underdeveloped countries Change to developing countries.
under way The program is under way.
under-five mortality rate (U5MR)
United Nations (UN)
United Nations Children’s Fund (UNICEF)
United Nations Conference on Trade and Development (UNCTAD)
United Nations Development Fund for Women (UNIFEM)
United Nations Development Programme (UNDP)
United Nations Economic Commission for Africa (UNECA)
United Nations Educational, Scientific, and Cultural Organization
(UNESCO)
United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP)
United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees (UNHCR)
United Nations Industrial Development Organization (UNIDO)
United Nations Office for Drug Control and Crime Prevention
(UNODCCP)
United Nations Population Fund (UNFPA)
United Nations Relief and Works Agency for Palestine Refugees in
the Near East (UNRWA)
United States (n); US (adj) the United States; US policy (see section 8.5.)
upper-middle-income (adj)
United States Agency for International Development (USAID)
value added tax (VAT)
vice president (no hyphen)
village development plan (VDP)
vis-à-vis Change to compared with, in relation to, relative to.
viz. Change to namely, that is.
voluntary counseling and testing (VCT)
webcasting facilities
web page
website
well-being
West African Economic and Monetary Union (WAEMU)
West African Monetary Union (WAMU)
where Reserve where for places; try at, on, in which.
whether See comments at if.
which See comments at that.
while Try although or whereas for clarity when at the same time as is not
what is meant.
wholesale price index (WPI)
-wide (suffix) (no hyphen unless with proper noun) worldwide, sectorwide, Bank-wide
wide-ranging (adj) wide-ranging effects, but the effects are wide ranging
with Try because of or at the same time as. It is often not clear whether
with means causation or coincidence, or nothing.
workday (n)
workforce (n)
workload (n)
workplace (n)

156 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


World Bank not the Bank
World Bank Institute (WBI) WBI, not the WBI
World Bank–International Monetary Fund, but Bank-Fund Joint World Bank–International Monetary Fund Annual Meetings;
Bank-Fund Annual Meetings
World Business Environment Survey (WBES)
World Conference on Religion and Peace
World Council of Churches
World Development Indicators (WDI)
World Development Report (WDR)
World Faiths Development Dialogue
World Food Programme (WFP)
World Health Organization (WHO)
World Trade Organization (WTO)
worldview
World Wide Web; the Web; but web page and website

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 157


APPENDIX G A LT E R N AT I V E W O R D S A N D P H R A S E S
The redundant expressions marked with a dagger (†) are incorrect and should be
changed. Alternative expressions for other words are meant as suggestions.

WORD OR PHRASE ALTERNATIVE


accorded gave
accordingly therefore, so
adequate number of enough
adjacent to next to

advance planning planning

advance reservation reservation
afford an opportunity allow, let
afforded gave
aforementioned this, these
as a means of to
as a result of because
at an early date soon
at the present time now
at the time when
at this (that) point in time now (then)
(are/is) authorized may
be in a position to can
be in receipt of have, received
beneficial aspects benefits

big in size big, large

blend together blend
by means of by, with

(in) close proximity to near

collaborate together collaborate
comes into conflict conflicts

conclusive proof proof

consensus of opinion consensus

critically important critical

current incumbent incumbent
demonstrate show
despite the fact that although
due to the fact that because
during such time as while

during the course of during
effectuate bring about
employ use

158 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


WORD OR PHRASE ALTERNATIVE
(are/is) empowered may
endeavor (verb) try

end result result

exact same same
(an) excessive number of too many

few in number few
for a period of for
foregoing this, these
for the purpose of for, to
for the reason that because
forthwith immediately

free gift gift
furnish give, send

future plans plans

future prospects prospects

gather together gather
give consideration to consider

great majority most, majority (if more than 50
percent)
have a need for need
herein here
heretofore up to this time
in agreement with agree
in a position to can, has, have
inasmuch as because
in a timely manner on time, promptly
in case if

individual person person
in lieu of instead of, in place of
in order for for
in order that that
in order to to
in regard to about
interface with deal with, work with, meet
in terms of by, in, of, on, for, about, in relation
to, through, with regard to
interpose an objection object
in the absence of without
in the case of in
in the course of during, in
in the event that if
in the interest of for, to
in the near future soon
in view of the fact that because, given that
is applicable to applies

join together join
liaise with coordinate with
limited number few

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 159


WORD OR PHRASE ALTERNATIVE
locality place
magnitude size
majority of most
make a decision decide
make a determination determine
make an adjustment adjust
make provision for provide
make use of use
manmade artificial, constructed
(the) manner in which how, the way

merge together merge
minimize decrease, lessen, reduce

mutual cooperation cooperation
necessitate need, require

new innovation innovation
not in a position to cannot, unable to
not later than by
not much little
notwithstanding the fact that although, even though
occasion (v) cause
participate take part

past experience, past history experience, history
period of two weeks two weeks

personal opinion opinion
pertaining to about, of, on
point in time point, time
possesses has
prior to before
provided that if
purchase buy
pursuant to under
pursuant to our agreement as we agreed

real fact fact
recapitulate sum up

recur again recur

refer back refer
relocation move
remainder rest
remuneration pay, payment
render give, make

revert back revert
serves as is
solicit ask for
state-of-the-art advanced, latest
take action act
take into consideration consider

temporary reprieve reprieve
thereof its, their

160 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


WORD OR PHRASE ALTERNATIVE
transmit send
transpire happen, occur, take place
until such time as until

usual custom custom
utilize use
verbatim exact, word for word

visible to the eye visible

vitally important vital
with a view to to
without further delay now, right away, immediately
with reference to about
with respect to about, on
with the exception of except for
with the knowledge that knowing

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 161


A P P E N D I X H  
WORLD BANK MAP GUIDELINES
These guidelines are provided by the Cartography unit. Areas of particular
importance are maps of India and maps showing India and Pakistan.

BOUNDARIES

Three styles are used to differentiate boundaries:

• Solid (no dashes), for undisputed international borders; most of the world
• Tightly dashed, for disputed borders; seven areas
– Between Western Sahara and Morocco
– Between India and Pakistan
– Between China and India
– Between the Democratic People’s Republic of Korea and the Republic of Korea
– Surrounding Abyei between Sudan and South Sudan
• Dotted, for the “Line of Control” in Kashmir between Pakistani- and Indian-controlled areas

Special cases
• Cyprus is shown as one nation.
• Only four lakes show boundaries: Chad, Malawi, Tanganyika, and Victoria.
• Boundary between Ecuador and Peru is solid.
• Boundary between the Arab Republic of Egypt and Sudan near the Red Sea does not curve
north into Egypt but follows the parallel all the way to the coast; the “Administrative Boundary”
is not shown.
• Boundary between Saudi Arabia and the Republic of Yemen is solid.
• Boundary between the Republic of Yemen and Oman is solid.
• Timor-Leste/Indonesia show two international boundaries to include the Oecussi enclave.
• Never on World Bank maps: the Kuril Islands and the Spratly Islands.
• Kosovo is shown as sovereign.
• For maps of Israel, West Bank and Gaza, and the Syrian Arab Republic, consult with the
­Cartography Unit staff.
• No maps should show the country of India (other than as part of the region or the world).
Individual province maps are acceptable; however, the provinces of Jammu Kashmir, Azad
Jammu Kashmir, and Arunachal Pradesh should not be depicted in maps and should not appear
in tables, figures, or text.

NAMES

Territories
The convention on maps is to use a smaller, italic type to differentiate between territories and
sovereign nations and identify the parent nation in parentheses after the name of the territory.
[No periods are used in the abbreviations of the parent country, which is an acceptable departure
from this style guide]:
• American Samoa (US)
• Aruba (Neth)

162 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


• Bermuda (UK)
• Bonaire (Neth) [formerly part of Netherlands Antilles (Neth)]
• Cayman Islands (UK)
• Curaçao (Neth) [formerly part of Netherlands Antilles (Neth)]
• Faroe Islands (Den)
• French Guiana (Fr)
• French Polynesia (Fr)
• Gibraltar (UK)
• Greenland (Den)
• Guadeloupe (Fr)
• Guam (US)
• Isle of Man (UK)
• Jersey (UK) and Guernsey (UK) [formerly Channel Islands]
• Martinique (Fr)
• Mayotte (Fr)
• New Caledonia (Fr)
• Northern Mariana Islands (US) [can abbreviate “Northern” to “N.”]
• Puerto Rico (US)
• La Réunion (Fr)
• US Virgin Islands (US)
• Western Sahara [previously Former Spanish Sahara]

Countries [Inconsistencies between the following list and this style guide are acceptable in maps.]
• The Bahamas
• Brunei Darussalam
• Dem. Rep. of Congo [no “the”; formerly Zaire]
• Congo [not Rep. of Congo]
• Côte d’Ivoire
• Czech Republic [or Czechia]
• Arab Rep. of Egypt
• Eswatini, not Swaziland
• The Gambia
• Islamic Republic of Iran [or I.R. of Iran]
• Dem. People’s Rep. of Korea [or D.P.R. of Korea]
• Rep. of Korea
• Kosovo
• Lao P.D.R.
• Federated States of Micronesia [spell it out]
• Montenegro [former Serbia and Montenegro]
• The Netherlands
• North Macedonia, not FYR Macedonia
• Russian Federation
• São Tomé and Príncipe
• Serbia [former Serbia and Montenegro]

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 163


• Slovak Republic
• South Sudan
• Syrian Arab Rep.
• Timor-Leste [former East Timor]
• R.B. de Venezuela
• Vietnam (one word)
• Rep. of Yemen

Special cases
• Hong Kong is “Hong Kong SAR, China.”
• Macao is “Macao SAR, China.”
• Taiwan is never identified with text on the map, except when all the Provinces of China are
named; in that case, Taiwan is named in the same manner.
• West Bank and Gaza: use same type style as for territories.
• Antarctica: use same type style as for territories.
• Kaliningrad enclave is to be labeled “Russian Fed.” and can be smaller size.

COLORING

Disputed territories
• Falkland Islands are always colored gray for “No Data.”
• Antarctica, South Georgia, South Sandwich, and any other land south of 60S is always colored
gray to indicate no data.
• Western Sahara is always colored gray to indicate “No Data.”
• Taiwan is always colored with China.
• South of the Kashmir Line of Control is always colored with India.
• North of the Kashmir Line of Control is always colored with Pakistan.

164 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


• The two disputed areas between China and India are to be colored so as to appear to be visually
halfway between the two countries’ colors; color for disputed areas should be the same as India
and China only when India and China themselves are the same color.
• Abyei (Sudan/South Sudan) is colored using the same method as for the India/China disputed areas.

Other details
• Kerguélen (Fr.) in S. Indian Ocean near Antarctica is colored gray and unnamed.
• Galapagos Islands is always colored with Ecuador.
• Spitzbergen (Svalbard) is always colored with Norway.
• Azores is always colored with Portugal.
• Canary Islands is always colored with Spain.
• Socotra Island is always colored with the Republic of Yemen.
• Andaman and Nicobar islands are always colored with India.
• Kaliningrad enclave is always colored with Russia.

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 165


Greenland
(Den.)
Hooked leader
Faroe
indentifying Nakichevan Russian Federation
Iceland Islands Norway enclave with Azerbaijan
(Den.) Finland Hooked leader indentifying tip of
Sweden No more
Canada Netherlands Saudi peninsula as part of Oman
Estonia Neutral Zone
Isle of Man (UK) Denmark Russian Latvia
Fed. Lithuania Regular int. boundary
Ireland United Germany Poland Belarus
Guernsey (UK) Kingdom Dashed int. boundary
Jersey (UK) Belgium Ukraine
Luxembourg Kazakhstan Mongolia Southern Kuril Islands
Moldova
Liechtenstein
France Romania D.P.R. need to be removed
- Dashed int. boundary Switzerland Kyrgyz Rep. China of Korea
Andorra Italy Bulgaria Georgia Azer- Uzbekistan
United States - no longer “Former Spanish Sahara” Armenia baijan Turkmenistan Dotted int. boundary Rep. of Japan
Portugal Spain Monaco Show Kosovo Turkey Tajikistan
but “Western Sahara” as Country Greece Cyprus Syrian Arab Islamic Rep. Always colored with Korea
Gibraltar (UK) Pakistani data
- Always colored as “No Data” color Tunisia Malta Lebanon Rep. of Iran Afghanistan
Bermuda (UK) Israel Iraq
Morocco Jordan
Kuwait Bhutan Color needs to be halfway between China’s color and India’s color
West Bank and Gaza Bahrain Pakistan Nepal Always colored with Chinese data
Algeria Libya Arab Rep. Qatar
The Bahamas Western of Egypt
Cayman Is. (UK) Sahara Saudi United Arab Bangladesh “Hong Kong SAR, China”
Cuba Turks and Caicos Islands (UK) Arabia Emirates Myanmar Lao “Macao SAR, China”
Mexico India
Haiti Oman P.D.R. N. Mariana Islands (US)
Belize Jamaica Cabo Verde Cabo Verde Mauritania Mali Always colored Vietnam
Niger Sudan Guam (US)
Guatemala Honduras not Cape Verde Senegal Chad
Eritrea Rep. of
Yemen with Indian data Dashed int. Thailand Marshall Islands
El Salvador Nicaragua The Gambia boundary Cambodia Philippines Federated States of Micronesia
Burkina Faso Djibouti
Panama R.B. de Guinea-Bissau Guinea Benin Nigeria Saudi/Yemen Brunei
Costa Rica Venezuela Guyana CôteGhana Sri
Sierra Leone Central South Ethiopia treaty boundary Lanka Darussalam
Suriname d’Ivoire
Colombia French Guiana (Fr.) Liberia Cameroon African Rep. Sudan Somalia Malaysia Palau
Togo Maldives
Equatorial Guinea Uganda Kiribati
Rep. of Kenya
Ecuador São Tomé and Príncipe Gabon Congo Rwanda Singapore Nauru
Dem. Rep. Burundi Seychelles NO COUNTRY MAPS OF INDIA. Indonesia
Kiribati Individual States, yes. Solomon
Hooked leader of Congo Papua
Tanzania Comoros Within South Asia Region, yes. New Guinea Islands
Peru Brazil identifying Cabinda
enclave with Angola Within the World, yes. Timor-Leste Tuvalu
Angola Hooked leader
Samoa Cook Is. (N.Z.) French Polynesia (Fr.) Zambia
Malawi Egypt/Sudan boundary
Mayotte straight across to Red Sea identifying Oecussi enclave
Bolivia (Fr.) Mauritius as part of Timor-Leste
Zimbabwe Vanuatu Fiji
Fiji Namibia Madagascar
American Germany
Samoa (US)
British Virgin Anguilla (UK)
Poland Botswana Mozambique La Réunion (Fr.)
Dominican Islands (UK) Paraguay
Puerto St.-Martin (Fr.)
Tonga Republic Regular int. boundary, straight across, New

Ukraine
Rico (US) St. Maarten (Neth.) Czech Republic Eswatini
St.-Barthélemy (Fr.)
Slovak Republic not curved up and over Australia Caledonia
U.S. Virgin Islands (US) Antigua and South Lesotho (Fr.)
Saba (Neth.) Barbuda Austria Africa - Dashed int. boundary around Abyei area
St. Eustatius (Neth.) Uruguay Hungary
St. Kitts Montserrat Guadeloupe (Fr.) Chile - Color needs to be halfway
Slovenia Romania between Sudan’s color and
and Nevis (UK) Dominica Argentina - Just “Serbia”
Martinique (Fr.) Croatia Bosnia & - Just “Montenegro” South Sudan’s color
San Serbia
Aruba St. Lucia Herzegovina - Just “Kosovo”
(Neth.) Curaçao Barbados Marino New
Bulgaria

(Neth.) St. Vincent and Kosovo Zealand


Bonaire the Grenadines Montenegro North
(Neth.) Grenada Macedonia
Vatican Italy Albania
City
Trinidad and
Tobago Greece

AUGUST 2019
This map was produced by the Cartography Unit of the World
Bank Group. The boundaries, colors, denominations and any other
information shown on this map do not imply, on the part of the
World Bank Group, any judgment on the legal status of any
territory, or any endorsement or acceptance of such boundaries.
A P P E N D I X I  
I N T E R N AT I O N A L S TA N D A R D S
O R G A N I Z AT I O N ( I S O ) C O D E S
The country code table includes the International Standards Organization (ISO)
3-digit alphabetic codes and the United Nations Statistics Division (UNSD)
3-digit equivalent numeric codes. The names and codes are used in both
databases.

Note: The country names in this list do not correspond to the official World Bank
listing in appendix C of this guide. The list is intended for use only by editors
and proofreaders to spot check ISO and UNSD codes in figures and tables.

COUNTRY CODES
COUNTRY OR ECONOMY NAME ISO3 UN
Afghanistan AFG 004
Åland Islands ALA 248
Albania ALB 008
Algeria DZA 012
American Samoa ASM 016
Andorra AND 020
Angola AGO 024
Anguilla AIA 660
Antarctica ATA 010
Antigua and Barbuda ATG 028
Argentina ARG 032
Armenia ARM 051
Aruba ABW 533
Australia AUS 036
Austria AUT 040
Azerbaijan AZE 031
Bahamas, The BHS 044
Bahrain BHR 048
Bangladesh BGD 050
Barbados BRB 052
Belarus BLR 112
Belgium BEL 056
Belize BLZ 084
Benin BEN 204
Bermuda BMU 060
Bhutan BTN 064
Bolivia (Plurinational State of) BOL 068
Bonaire, Sint Eustatius, and Saba BES 035
Bosnia and Herzegovina BIH 070
Botswana BWA 072
Bouvet Island BVT 074
Brazil BRA 076

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 167


COUNTRY CODES
COUNTRY OR ECONOMY NAME ISO3 UN
British Indian Ocean Territory IOT 086
Brunei Darussalam BRN 096
Bulgaria BGR 100
Burkina Faso BFA 854
Burundi BDI 108
Cabo Verde CPV 132
Cambodia KHM 116
Cameroon CMR 120
Canada CAN 124
Cayman Islands CYM 136
Central African Republic CAF 140
Chad TCD 148
Chile CHL 152
China CHN 156
Christmas Island CXR 162
Cocos (Keeling) Islands CCK 166
Colombia COL 170
Comoros COM 174
Congo (the Dem. Rep. of) COD 180
Congo COG 178
Cook Islands COK 184
Costa Rica CRI 188
Côte d’Ivoire CIV 384
Croatia HRV 191
Cuba CUB 192
Curaçao CUW 531
Cyprus CYP 196
Czechia CZE 203
Denmark DNK 208
Djibouti DJI 262
Dominica DMA 212
Dominican Republic DOM 214
Ecuador ECU 218
Egypt EGY 818
El Salvador SLV 222
Equatorial Guinea GNQ 226
Eritrea ERI 232
Estonia EST 233
Eswatini SWZ 748
Ethiopia ETH 231
Falkland Islands FLK 238
Faroe Islands FRO 234
Fiji FJI 242
Finland FIN 246
France FRA 250
French Guiana GUF 254
French Polynesia PYF 258

168 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


COUNTRY CODES
COUNTRY OR ECONOMY NAME ISO3 UN
Gabon GAB 266
Gambia GMB 270
Georgia GEO 268
Germany DEU 276
Ghana GHA 288
Gibraltar GIB 292
Greece GRC 300
Greenland GRL 304
Grenada GRD 308
Guadeloupe GLP 312
Guam GUM 316
Guatemala GTM 320
Guernsey GGY 831
Guinea GIN 324
Guinea-Bissau GNB 624
Guyana GUY 328
Haiti HTI 332
Heard Island and McDonald Islands HMD 334
Holy See VAT 336
Honduras HND 340
Hong Kong HKG 344
Hungary HUN 348
Iceland ISL 352
India IND 356
Indonesia IDN 360
Iran (Islamic Republic of) IRN 364
Iraq IRQ 368
Ireland IRL 372
Isle of Man IMN 833
Israel ISR 376
Italy ITA 380
Jamaica JAM 388
Japan JPN 392
Jersey JEY 832
Jordan JOR 400
Kazakhstan KAZ 398
Kenya KEN 404
Kiribati KIR 296
Korea (Dem. People’s Rep. of) PRK 408
Korea (Republic of) KOR 410
Kuwait KWT 414
Kyrgyzstan KGZ 417
Lao People’s Democratic Republic LAO 418
Latvia LVA 428
Lebanon LBN 422
Lesotho LSO 426
Liberia LBR 430

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 169


COUNTRY CODES
COUNTRY OR ECONOMY NAME ISO3 UN
Libya LBY 434
Liechtenstein LIE 438
Lithuania LTU 440
Luxembourg LUX 442
Macao MAC 446
Madagascar MDG 450
Malawi MWI 454
Malaysia MYS 458
Maldives MDV 462
Mali MLI 466
Malta MLT 470
Marshall Islands MHL 584
Martinique MTQ 474
Mauritania MRT 478
Mauritius MUS 480
Mayotte MYT 175
Mexico MEX 484
Micronesia (Fed. Sts. of) FSM 583
Moldova (the Republic of) MDA 498
Monaco MCO 492
Mongolia MNG 496
Montenegro MNE 499
Montserrat MSR 500
Morocco MAR 504
Mozambique MOZ 508
Myanmar MMR 104
Namibia NAM 516
Nauru NRU 520
Nepal NPL 524
Netherlands NLD 528
New Caledonia NCL 540
New Zealand NZL 554
Nicaragua NIC 558
Niger NER 562
Nigeria NGA 566
Niue NIU 570
Norfolk Island NFK 574
Northern Mariana Islands MNP 580
North Macedonia MKD 807
Norway NOR 578
Oman OMN 512
Pakistan PAK 586
Palau PLW 585
Panama PAN 591
Papua New Guinea PNG 598
Paraguay PRY 600
Peru PER 604

170 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


COUNTRY CODES
COUNTRY OR ECONOMY NAME ISO3 UN
Philippines PHL 608
Pitcairn PCN 612
Poland POL 616
Portugal PRT 620
Puerto Rico PRI 630
Qatar QAT 634
Réunion REU 638
Romania ROM 642
Russian Federation RUS 643
Rwanda RWA 646
Saint Barthélemy BLM 652
Saint Helena, Ascension, and Tristan da Cunha SHN 654
Saint Kitts and Nevis KNA 659
Saint Lucia LCA 662
Saint Martin (French) MAF 663
Saint Pierre and Miquelon SPM 666
Saint Vincent and the Grenadines VCT 670
Samoa WSM 882
San Marino SMR 674
Sao Tome and Principe STP 678
Saudi Arabia SAU 682
Senegal SEN 686
Serbia SRB 688
Seychelles SYC 690
Sierra Leone SLE 694
Singapore SGP 702
Sint Maarten (Dutch) SXM 534
Slovakia SVK 703
Slovenia SVN 705
Solomon Islands SLB 090
Somalia SOM 706
South Africa ZAF 710
South Georgia and the South Sandwich Islands SGS 239
South Sudan SSD 728
Spain ESP 724
Sri Lanka LKA 144
Sudan SDN 729
Suriname SUR 740
Svalbard and Jan Mayen SJM 744
Sweden SWE 752
Switzerland CHE 756
Syrian Arab Republic SYR 760
Taiwan (Province of China) TWN 158
Tajikistan TJK 762
Tanzania, the United Rep. of TZA 834
Thailand THA 764
Timor-Leste TLS 626

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 171


COUNTRY CODES
COUNTRY OR ECONOMY NAME ISO3 UN
Togo TGO 768
Tokelau TKL 772
Tonga TON 776
Trinidad and Tobago TTO 780
Tunisia TUN 788
Turkey TUR 792
Turkmenistan TKM 795
Turks and Caicos Islands TCA 796
Tuvalu TUV 798
Uganda UGA 800
Ukraine UKR 804
United Arab Emirates ARE 784
United Kingdom of Great Britain and
Northern Ireland GBR 826
United States Minor Outlying Islands UMI 581
United States of America USA 840
Uruguay URY 858
Uzbekistan UZB 860
Vanuatu VUT 548
Venezuela (Bol. Rep. of) VEN 862
Viet Nam VNM 704
Virgin Islands (British) VGB 092
Virgin Islands (US) VIR 850
Wallis and Futuna WLF 876
Western Sahara ESH 732
World WLD 000
Yemen YEM 887
Zambia ZMB 894
Zimbabwe ZWE 716

172 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


INDEX
References are to section numbers and Appendixes (App.).

A
“AA,” 2.49 and others, 16.2 in source documentation, 16.38
abbreviations, 8.1–.9, App. E annexes, 3.1, 3.3 titles of, 7.27
of Bank regional vice presidencies, boxes in, 12.3 The Bluebook: A Uniform System
use of, 8.3 numbering of figures in, 13.3 of Citation, 7.24, 16.12
capitalization of, 8.8 numbering of tables in, 14.3 boldface in names of World Bank
commonly known appendixes initiatives, programs,
abbreviations, 8.2, App. E boxes in, 12.3 projects, etc., 7.6
of country names, 7.13, 8.5, App. C indexing of, 17.2 books. See also titles of works
of currency types, 9.14 numbering of figures in, 13.3 examples of source citations, 16.15–.24
of economy names, 8.5 numbering of tables in, 14.3 parts of the book, 3.1–.6. See also
EU-10, 8.9 placement of, 3.1, 3.3 specific parts (e.g., table of
in figures, 13.5, 13.9 articles contents)
first occurrence in book vs. in “the” as initial word prior to boxes. See text boxes
each chapter, 8.2 abbreviations, 8.7 brackets, 5.25–.29
of foreign organizations’ names, 7.9 “the” at front of periodical titles, 7.22 around monetary amounts, 9.14
G-20, 8.9 articles and essays. See periodicals in mathematical expressions, 5.28
of geographic regions, 8.3, 8.4 artwork. See figures and illustrations for parentheses within
in headings, 11.5 author-date references, 4.2, 5.29, parentheses, 5.26
of inclusive numbers, 9.6 12.7, 13.21, 16.2 punctuation, 5.3
in indexes, 17.5 author queries brand names, 7.15
list of, placement in book, 3.1 on blank cells in tables, 14.18 bulleted lists, 5.35
in mathematical expressions, 15.4 on comparison of decimals, 14.19
of numerical units, 9.7 on missing source information, 16.6 C
in parentheses after spelled reprint permission needed, 4.1 callouts in place of graphics, 2.33
out words, 8.2 on shortening of text boxes, 12.2 capitalization
postal abbreviations, 8.6 from text editing, 2.36, 2.40 of abbreviations, 8.8
in tables, 14.6, 14.8, 14.11, 14.12 authors of sources after colon, 5.14
“the” as initial word prior to, 8.7 multiple authors, 16.8, 16.16 in axis title, 13.13
use of, 8.2 names of, 16.2, 16.7 of box titles, 12.4
of U.S. states, 8.6 single author, 16.15 of bulleted lists, 5.35
word division of, 7.44 tables, indication of authors for, 14.21 of column heads in tables, 14.9
about the authors or editors, 3.1 automatic hyphenation, 2.35, 5.19, 7.49 of compound words, 7.37
access dates for URLs and e-mails, 6.3 axes in figures, 13.7, 13.11–.15 of database titles, 7.26
acknowledgments label of x-axis, 13.15 of electronic publication titles, 7.25
placement of, 3.1 titles of, 13.13, 13.14 of English-language
professional titles in, 7.11 zero in, 13.11 print publications, 7.16
acronyms of figure titles, 13.4
in indexes, 17.5 B of foreign-language publications, 7.28
list of, App. E background papers as of foreign organizations’ names, 7.9
“the” as initial word prior to, 8.7 source documentation, 16.31 of headings, 11.6
adjectives, using US or UK as, 8.5 back matter in indexes, 17.3
Adobe Acrobat. See PDFs electronic publications, 3.6 of Note, 13.22, 14.23
age designations, 9.20 order and placement of, 3.1 of public document titles, 7.24
A-level heading, 11.1 Bank. See World Bank Group of quotation’s initial letter, 10.5
alignment of column heads, 14.10 basic publishing stream, 1 of regions, 7.12
alphabetization of index, 17.7 bibliographies, 13.21, 16.5 of Source or Sources, 14.21
alternatives distinguished from reference lists, 16.5 of stub entries in tables, 14.13
use of slash, 5.30 placement of, 3.1, 3.4 of table titles, 14.5
words and phrases to use as source documentation, 4.2 of titles of works, 7.16, 7.20, 7.23
alternatives, App. G billions, 9.12 type of, production editor to
ALWD Citation Manual: A Professional blank cells in tables, 14.18 specify, 2.5, 2.30
System of Citation, 7.24, 16.12 block quotations, 10.6 of unit indicator in table, 14.7
“and/or” structure, 5.30 blogs of website, web page, and blog titles, 7.27

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 173


of World Bank initiatives, loans, to differentiate data lines in figures, 13.17 date format, 5.9, 9.15–.18
programs, projects, and in maps, App. H century reference, 9.19
strategies, 7.6 column heads in tables, 14.4, 14.9–.12 contraction of range for same
of World Bank unit names, 7.5 alignment of, 14.10 century, 9.17
cardinal numbers, treatment of, 9.1 capitalization of, 14.9 decade reference, 9.16
Cartography and clearance of maps, 2.22 content of, 14.12 in figure titles, 13.5
Category 1 publications, 1 unit indicators, 14.11 fiscal year, 5.31, 9.18
Category 2 publications, 1 comma, 5.6–.13 parenthetical source citation with
CD-ROMs. See electronic publications with adverbs “too” and “either,” 5.13 author-date reference, 5.29
century in dates, 5.9 slashes in years, 5.31, 9.18
changes in year ranges, 9.17 with introductory words and phrases, 5.7 specific dates, 9.15
spelling out, 9.19 in mathematical expressions, 5.11, 15.20 in table titles, 14.6
chapters with “not” and “not only” phrases, 5.8 year ranges, 9.17
annexes, 3.1, 3.3 in numbers, 9.4 years alone, 9.16
citation of, in source parenthetical source citations, 5.12 date of access for URLs, 6.3
documentation, 16.19 with questions, 5.10 decades, 9.1
referring to by number, 9.1 serial comma, 5.6 decimals, 9.10, 14.19
titles of, 7.19, 11.1 comparisons, decimals in, 9.10, 14.19 departments of World Bank,
Character Map for minus sign, 5.24, 15.22 compounds capitalization of, 7.5
characters. See symbols capitalization of, 7.37 Developmental Editing Checklist, App. A.1
charts. See figures and illustrations hyphens in, 2.35, 5.19 dictionaries. See also Merriam-
checklists modifiers, hyphenation of, 5.20 Webster’s Collegiate Dictionary
author’s, App. A.6 computer-related terms, 7.34 online, 16.39
editorial, 2.5, 2.30, App. A.1, App. A.6 conference papers. See also informally documentation. See source documentation
figures, editing of, 13.27 published works DOIs (digital object identifiers), 6.5, 7.35
proofreading, 2.7, 2.46, 2.47, source documentation, 16.29–.30 dollars. See monetary amounts
App. A.5, App. B.1 conjunctions, using “and/or” structure, 5.30 double brackets, author queries in, 2.36
quality control check, App. A.8 consultants in editorial process, 2.4 double-digit numbers, 9.1
The Chicago Manual of Style, 17th ed., “continued” lines for tables, 14.4
as editorial reference, 1 contributors’ list, 3.1 E
citation. See source documentation copublications as source documents, 16.23 eBooks published by World Bank.
city names. See place names copyeditors, cleanup See electronic publications
cleanup instructions for instructions for, 2.40, App. A.4 economy names, 7.13
copyeditors, 2.40, App. A.4 copyright issues abbreviations of, 8.5
client of World Bank with internet postings, 16.11 codes to identify countries as data
Developmental Editing Checklist permissions, 4.1–.3 points in figures, 13.19
for, App. A.1 with source lines, 13.21, 14.21 edited manuscript
page proof revisions by, 2.14 copyright page, 2.51, 3.1, App. B.3 sent to production editor, 2.8, 2.37
queries to. See author queries Corporate Secretariat’s list of sent to proofreader, 2.7, 2.46
review by, 2.9, 2.38 country names, 7.13, App. C editing. See editorial process; hard-copy
final approval, 2.18 correction checking, 2.17, 2.50 edits; manuscript editing
number of rounds, 2.5, 2.17, 2.30, 2.38 compilation of editorial checklists, 2.5, 2.30,
number of rounds during corrections, 2.4, 2.15, 2.49 App. A.1, App. A.5
editorial phase, 2.11 country names, 7.13, App. C. Excel figure preparation
revisions by, marked as “AA,” 2.49 See also place names guidelines, App. A.9
role of, 2.4 abbreviations of, 8.5, App. C manuscript preparation guidelines,
style exceptions for, 1 codes to identify countries as data App. A.7
Substantive Editing Checklist points in figures, 13.19, 13.22 quality control, App. A.8
for, App. A.1 with currency units, 9.14 editorial process, 2.1–.51. See also
transmission of edited International Standards manuscript editing
manuscript to, 2.8 Organization (ISO) codes, App. I defined, 2.1
coding of heading levels, 11.1 court case citations, 16.12 Excel figure preparation guidelines,
colon credit. See permissions App. A.9
after “DOI,” 6.5, 7.35 credits for illustrations, 3.1 figures, flow of, 2.19–.22, 2.41, App. A.9
after Note, 13.22, 14.23 Cross-Cutting Solutions Areas (CCSAs), 7.3 hard copy. See hard-copy edits
after Source or Sources, 14.21 cross-references in indexes, 17.5 illustrations, flow of, 2.42
capitalization after, 5.14 currencies. See monetary amounts managing, 2.5–.29. See also
inappropriate uses of, 5.15 production editor
in parenthetical source citations, 5.16 D maps, flow of, 2.22, 2.42
with subtitles, 7.18 dashes. See also em dash; en dash math, flow of, 2.23–.25
in tables, 14.12, 14.16, 14.17 in figure titles, 13.5 preparation guidelines, App. A.7
color in table titles, 14.6 proofreading, 2.3, 2.46–.51.
author queries in yellow in text headings, 11.4 See also proofreader
highlighting, 2.36 database citations, 7.26, 16.14, 16.40 and proofreading

174 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


quality control check, 2.50 Excel United States or US in, 8.5
tables, flow of, 2.26–.29 figure preparation guidelines, App. A.9 unit indicators, 13.7–.9
team involved in, 2.4 tables, editing of, 2.44 World Bank data used in, 13.21
text, flow of, 2.8–.18, 2.34–.40 exceptions for client needs, 1 files. See electronic files; Word files
editorial team, 2.4 executive summary, 3.1 final pages, 2.18
editors in source citations, 16.17 extracts. See quotations first page proofs, 2.4, 2.13
electronic files. See also PDFs; figures as part of, 2.21
redlining; Word files F proofreading of, 2.47
division into separate chapter files, 2.31 fair use, doctrine of, 4.1 tables as part of, 2.28
graphics, placement in figures and illustrations, 13.1–.28. fiscal year, 5.31, 9.18
separate files, 2.33 See also graphics flow charts, 4.2
Math folder, 2.43 abbreviation of region names in, 7.12 footnotes. See notes
production editor to provide to abbreviation within titles, 13.5 foreign-language publications,
manuscript editor, 2.5, 2.30 axes in, 13.7, 13.11–.15 7.28–.32
programs other than Word or callouts for, 2.33 capitalization of, 7.28
Excel, 2.45 Category 3 publications, 13.26 citation of, 16.24
electronic publications, 7.25–.27 checklist for editing, 13.27 italicization of, 7.30
conference papers as, 16.30 composition of, 13.10–.20 periodicals, 7.32
incorporating navigation, consistency of treatment, 13.10 punctuation of, 7.29
hyperlinking, and adapting content of titles, 13.5 translation of titles of, 7.31
front and back matter, 3.6 country codes to identify data transliterated titles of, 7.30
internet postings as source points in, 13.19 foreign-language quotations, 10.7
documentation, 16.11 credits for illustrations, 3.1 foreign organization names, 7.9
source documentation, 16.18, 16.34–.42 data lines and data points in, 13.17 foreign words
URLs, DOIs, and e-mail addresses in, 6.5 differentiation of data lines by translation of, 7.39
eLibrary, 1 color or line patterns, 13.17 treatment of, 7.38
ellipses economy codes to identify foreword, 3.1
in elided operations and relations, 5.5 data points in, 13.19 Formal Publishing Program
in figure titles, 13.5 editorial process for, 2.5, 2.19–.22, author’s checklist, App. A.6
in headings, 11.4 2.30, 2.37, 2.41, 2.42 manuscript preparation
in mathematical expressions, 15.21 examples of edited figures, 13.28 guidelines, App. A.7
in quotations, 5.4, 10.10 Excel figure preparation publishing categories, 1
in tables, 14.6 guidelines, App. A.9 submission of author
e-mail frames and boxes around, 13.16 manuscripts to, App. A.6
addresses FY in, 9.18 formatting instructions for
line breaks and, 6.2 gridlines in, 13.16 Word files, App. A.3
word division of, 7.46 indexing of, 17.2 forthcoming works, examples of
source of documentation, 16.13 keys for, 13.18 source citations, 16.20
spelling of, 7.34 legends for, 13.18 foul proofs, 2.7, 2.46
em dash line labels, 13.18 fractions, 9.1, 9.8, 9.10, 15.9
in reference lists and multiple panels of figures in front matter
bibliographies, 16.7 text boxes, 12.5, 13.6 electronic publications, 3.6
use of, 5.22 notes in, 13.20–.24 indexing of, 17.2
Word character for, 5.22 general note, 13.22 order and placement of, 3.1
encyclopedia articles, online, 16.39 order of, 13.23 FY (fiscal year), 5.31, 9.18
en dash source notes, 13.21
items of equal weight not to specific notes, 13.23, 13.24 G
use, 5.21, 5.23 superscript letters, use of, 13.20 G-20, proper form of, 8.9
with numbers, 9.5 numbering of, 13.3, 13.26 gender, use of “he or she,” 5.30
Word character for, 5.23 numerical unit abbreviation in, 9.7 geographic terms. See also
in year ranges, 9.17 original, author-created, 4.2 place names
endnotes, 16.3. See also notes percent symbol in, 9.9 capitalization of, 7.5, 7.12
English-language electronic permissions, 4.1 country names, App. C
publications, 7.25–.27 pie charts, 13.7 in figures, 13.5
English-language print placement of, 12.8 in tables, 14.6
publications, 7.16–.24 “Rep.” abbreviation in, 7.13 U.S. states, 8.6
capitalization of, 7.16 slash to indicate “per” in, 5.32 Global Practices (GPs), 7.3
italicization of, 7.17 source documentation, 4.1, 4.2 glossary, 3.1
subtitles, 7.18 source line, punctuation of, 5.29 graphics. See also figures
equations, 15.14–.16. See also subtitles of, 13.6 and illustrations; tables
mathematical expressions within text boxes, 12.5 placement in separate files,
essays, titles of, 7.19 text references to figures, 13.2 2.30, 2.33
et al., 16.2 titles of, 13.4–.6 provision to production editor, 2.37
EU-10, proper form of, 8.9 United Kingdom or UK in, 8.5 within text boxes, 12.5

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 175


H capitalization of, 7.6 M
half-title page, 3.1 of organizations other than manuscript. See also client of World Bank;
handbooks, numbering of headings in, 11.3 World Bank, 7.10 edited manuscript
hardcopy edits institutional names. See World Bank breaking into chapter files, 2.31
figures and illustrations, 2.41, 2.42 Group client to provide original, 2.4
math, 2.43 instructions to typesetter. preparation guidelines, App. A.7
proofreading of, 2.47 See typesetter manuscript editing. See also
tables, 2.27, 2.44 International Standards manuscript editor
transmission for client review and Organization (ISO) country name coding of heading levels, 11.1
proofreading, 2.13 codes, App. I defined, 2.2
hard hyphens, 2.35, 5.19, 7.49 internet, 7.34. See also Developmental Editing Checklist,
headings, 11.1–.6 electronic publications App. A.1
abbreviations in, 11.5 interrogative. See question marks Excel figure preparation guidelines,
capitalization of, 11.6 intranet, 7.34 App. A.9
content of, 11.4 introduction, 3.1 hard copy. See hard-copy edits
dashes in, 11.4 introductory note in index, 17.2 Mechanical Editing Checklist, App. A.1
ellipses in, 11.4 introductory words and queries. See author queries
format of, 11.6 phrases reprint permission needed,
hyphenation in, 11.6 in bulleted lists, 5.35 flagging for, 4.1
levels of, 11.1 punctuation of, 5.7 shortening of text boxes, 12.2
numbering of, 11.3 in quotations, 10.12 submission to publishing unit, App. A.6
stacked heads, 11.2 italicization Substantive Editing Checklist, App. A.1
headnote at top of index, 17.2 of “continued” for tables, 14.4 text, 2.34–.40
“he or she,” use of, 5.30 of electronic publication titles, 7.25 manuscript editor. See also
highlighting of author queries, 2.36 of English-language print titles, 7.17 manuscript editing
hyperlinking, 3.6 of foreign-language titles, 7.30 post-editing activities
hyphenation, 5.19–.24 of mathematical characters, 15.25 figures and illustrations, 2.41, 2.42
automatic, 2.35, 5.19, 7.49 of names of World Bank initiatives, incorporation of revisions, 2.4, 2.40
of compounds, 5.20 programs, projects, etc., 7.6 maps, 2.42
dashes instead of hyphens, 5.21–.23 of newspaper titles, 7.22 math and, 2.43, 15.24–.27
in headings, 11.6 of Note, 13.22, 14.23 transmission of files to
of items of equal weight, 5.21 of public document titles, 7.24 production editor, 2.37, 2.40
during manuscript editing process, 2.35 of Source or Sources, 14.21 transmission of files to
minus sign instead of hyphen, 15.22 of subtitles, 7.18 typesetter, 2.6, 2.40
in titles, 7.20 of unit indicator transmission of revisions to, 2.10
in figure, 13.8 pre-editing activities
I in table, 14.7 breaking manuscript into chapter
illustrations. See figures and illustrations files by, 2.31
importing of tables into Word, 2.45 J materials to be provided to, 2.5, 2.30
inclusive numbers journals. See periodicals tables, 2.44
abbreviating of, 9.6 role of, 2.4
in indexes, 17.4 K maps
incorporation of revisions, 2.4, 2.40 knowledge publishing stream, 1 clearance of, 2.22
indented indexes, 17.6 editing of, 2.42
indexes, 17.2–.8 L guidelines for, App. H
abbreviations in, 17.5 leading zero in decimal factions, 9.10 of India, 13.25, App. H
alphabetization of, 17.7 legal citations, 7.24, 16.12 numbering of, 13.25
capitalization in, 17.3 length PDFs of, 13.25
cross-references in, 17.5 of boxes, 12.2 permissions, 4.1, 13.25
inclusive numbers in, 17.4 long tables, 14.4 source line, 13.25
indented style of, 17.6 line breaks punctuation of, 5.29
introductory note in, 17.2 displayed equations, 15.15 markings, editorial. See also
numbers in, 17.8 URLs and e-mail addresses, 6.2 editorial process
placement of, 3.1 lists, 5.33–.35 coding of heading levels, 11.1
what indexes should include, 17.2 bulleted, 5.35 on hard copy. See hard-copy edits
India, maps of, 13.25, App. H numbered, 5.33, 5.35 instructions for using Adobe
indirect questions and question marks, 5.18 run-in, 5.33 Acrobat, App. B.2
informally published works vertical (outline style), 5.34 queries. See author queries
citation of, 7.23, 16.11, 16.28–.32 listserver, 7.34 tracking of. See redlining
electronic sources, 16.37 loan programs, capitalization of, 7.6 mathematical expressions, 15.1–.27
minimum source information organizations other than abbreviations, 15.4
needed for, 16.6 World Bank, 7.10 ambiguous characters, 15.26
initialisms, 8.7 location names. See place names breaks, 15.15
initiatives lowercase letters. See capitalization commas, 15.20

176 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


consistency between text and of organizations, 7.8–.10 word division of numerals, 7.43
displayed equations, 15.24 personal names, 7.11
consistency of, 15.2 place names, 7.12–.14 O
definitions, 15.12 in source documentation. See source objectives of guide, 1
delimiters, 15.5 documentation online. See also electronic publications
determinants, 15.10 titles of works, 7.16–.32, 16.9. See also dictionaries and encyclopedias, 16.39
displayed equations, 15.14–.16 titles of works spelling of, 7.34
editorial process for, 2.23–.25, 2.43, of World Bank units, 7.2–.7 Open Knowledge Repository, 1
15.24–.27 navigation in electronic publications, 3.6 ordinal numbers, treatment of, 9.1
ellipses, 15.21 newspapers. See also periodicals Organisation for Economic Co-operation
end punctuation of, 15.19 foreign newspapers’ names and Development, 7.8
formal statements, 15.12 and cities, 7.32 organizations other than World Bank
fractions. See fractions titles, 7.22 as authors of source documents, 16.2
integrals, 15.7 news releases. See also foreign organizations, 7.9
italicization of characters, 15.25 informally published works as publishers, 16.7
matrices, 15.10 source documentation, 16.31 references to, 7.8–.10
minus signs, 5.24, 15.22 notes spelling of, 7.8
multiple expressions in a single about monetary amounts, 9.12–.14 overview, 3.1
display, 15.17 defining abbreviations and symbols, 13.9 boxes in, 12.3
multiplication sign, 5.5, 15.21, 15.23 nonstandard abbreviations and numbering of figures in, 13.3
numbering of displayed symbols, 13.22 numbering of tables in, 14.3
expressions, 15.16 in tables, 14.8, 14.12, 14.15,
parentheses and brackets, 5.28 14.16, 14.18 P
probability, 15.13 within figures, 13.20–.24. page numbers in source citations, 16.2
punctuation of, 5.11, 15.17–.23 See also figures and illustrations page proofs. See also first page proofs
radicals, 15.8 indexing of, 17.2 circulation of, 2.13
scalars, vectors, and tensors, 15.11 introductory note in index, 17.2 client review, 2.17–.18
signs and symbols, 15.3 placement of, 3.1, 3.4, 16.3 compilation of changes, 2.15
single expression with source notes. See source correction checking of, 2.17
multiple lines, 15.18 documentation figures and illustrations as part of, 2.20
statistics, 9.1, 15.13 within tables, 14.20, 14.22–.24. foul proofs, 2.7, 2.46
subscripts and superscripts, 15.6, 15.27 See also tables proofreading of, 2.4, 2.7, 2.46
summations, 15.7 within text boxes, 12.6 revisions of, 2.14
theorems, 15.12 wording of Note, 13.22, 14.23 parentheses, 5.25–.29
word division of, 7.47 “not” phrases, 5.8 in mathematical expressions, 5.28
matrix (in mathematics), 15.10 “not only” phrases, 5.8 within parentheses, 5.26
measurements numbered lists, 5.33, 5.35 punctuation, 5.3
abbreviation of, 9.7 numbers, 9.1–.20 in quotations for insertions by original
numerical expression of, 9.1 abbreviating of numerical units, 9.7 authors, 5.27, 10.11
Mechanical Editing Checklist, App. A.1 age designations, 9.20 translation of foreign-language
Merriam-Webster’s Collegiate Dictionary in axes, 13.11 titles in, 7.9, 7.31
authority for word division, 7.41 at beginning of sentence, 9.2 parenthetical source citations
as editorial reference, 1 cardinals and ordinals, treatment of, 9.1 colons and semicolons in, 5.16
Microsoft Word. See Word files commas in, 9.4 commas in, 5.12
minus signs, 5.24, 15.22 consistency, 9.3 parentheses in, 5.29
missing material in quotations, 10.13 in dates. See date format parts of the book, 3.1–.6. See also
monetary amounts, 9.1, 9.12–.14 double-digit numbers, 9.1 specific parts
billions, 9.12 en dashes with, 9.5 (e.g., table of contents)
currency symbols, use of, 9.13 fractions, 9.1, 9.8, 9.10 part title, 3.1
currency types and units, 9.14 inclusive numbers PDFs
list by country, App. D abbreviating of, 9.6 client use of, 2.9, 2.14
U.S. dollars, 9.13 in indexes, 17.4 figures and illustrations provided as, 2.20
multiauthor books in indexes, 17.8 instructions for using
citation of, 16.8, 16.16 less than one, 9.10 Adobe Acrobat, App. B.2
table of contents, 2.5, 2.30, 3.2 monetary amounts, 9.1 maps in low-resolution, 13.25
multiplication sign money. See monetary amounts page proofs provided as, 2.13–.14
cross, 15.23 numerals vs. words, 9.1 proofreading of, 2.7, 2.46–.51, App. B.2
dot, 5.5, 15.21 percentages, 9.1, 9.9 redlined, 2.8
multivolume works, examples of source physical quantities, 9.1 tables provided as, 2.28
citations, 16.22 punctuation in, 9.4–.6 “per,” use of slash for, 5.32
ratios, 9.1, 9.11 percentages, 9.1, 9.9
N spelled-out numbers, percent symbol, 9.9
names, 7.2–.32 capitalization in, 11.6 period (punctuation)
brand names, 7.15 for table columns, 14.12 ellipses in quotations, 5.4

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 177


in foreign subtitles, 7.29 queries to, 2.36 around quotations, 10.8
periodicals role of, 2.4 around titles
article titles, 7.19 text, flow of, 2.8–.18 of articles, feature stories, chapters,
electronic sources, 16.35–.36 transmission of edited files to typesetter etc., 7.19, 7.25, 16.25–.27
examples of source figures and illustrations, 2.19 of unpublished or informally
documentation, 16.25–.27 text, 2.6, 2.12 published works, 7.23
foreign-language titles, 7.32 professional titles, 7.11 of Web pages, 7.27
italicization of name of, 7.17 programs and projects, capitalization of, 7.6 blog entries in, 7.27
minimum source information organizations other than World Bank, 7.10 punctuation with, 5.2, 10.9
needed for, 16.6 pronouns, use of “he or she,” 5.30 single, 10.8
month instead of issue number, 16.27 proofreader and proofreading quotations, 10.1–.13
no issue number, 16.26 checking of corrections on revised attribution and permission, 4.2
“the” as initial word of title, 7.22 page proofs, 2.17 block quotations, 10.6
permissions, 4.1–.3, 10.1 checklist, 2.7, 2.46, 2.47, brackets for non-author insertions
for figures, 13.21 App. A.5, App. B.1 within, 5.27, 10.11
for illustrations, 3.1 compilation of corrections by, 2.4, 2.49 capitalization of initial letter in, 10.5
source documentation, 4.2 copyright page, 2.51 credit for, 10.1
written, 4.1 correction checking on revised ellipses in, 5.4, 10.10
personal communications as source page proofs, 2.50 in foreign language, 10.7
documentation, 16.13 definition of proofreading, 2.3 introductory phrases for, 10.12
personal names, 7.11 first page proofs, 2.4, 2.13, missing material, 10.13
word division of, 7.42 2.47, App. B.1 paragraphing of, 10.6
photographs. See figures and illustrations instructions for using Adobe parentheses for original author
phrases Acrobat, App. B.2 insertions within, 5.27, 10.11
alternative words and phrases, App. G materials to be provided to, 2.7, 2.46 parentheses within, 10.11
introductory. See introductory PDFs or hard copy, 2.7, 2.46 permissible changes to, 10.3
words and phrases quality control check, 2.50 permissions for. See permissions
physical quantities, numerical queries by, 2.48 quotation marks around, 10.8
expression of, 9.1, 9.7 revisions permissible, 2.48 run-in style, 10.4
pictorial elements. See figures role of, 2.4, 2.46–.51 set-off style, 10.4, 10.6
and illustrations second and subsequent page source citations, 10.2
“pictures,” tables imported into Word proofs, 2.4, 2.17, 2.50, App. B.1 treatment of, 10.4–.7
as, 2.45 source citation, reordering of, 16.2
pie charts, 13.7. See also figures word-for-word comparison to edited R
and illustrations manuscript, 2.47 radicals in mathematical expressions, 15.8
place names, 7.12–.14 proofs. See page proofs range of years, 9.17
abbreviation of, 8.3–.5 proper names, 7.42. See also names ratios, 9.1, 9.11
capitalization of defined regions, 7.12 public document citations, 7.24, 16.12, 16.33 recto or verso pages, 3.1
confusion with Bank’s regional vice publisher information in redlining
presidencies (“Regions”), 7.12, 8.3 source information, 16.7 clean files not to contain, 2.40
country names, 7.13 publishing categories, 1 client review to use, 2.9
for foreign periodical titles, 7.32 punctuation, 5.1–.32. manuscript editor to use, 2.8, 2.34, 2.37
for newspaper titles, 7.22 See also specific types production editor compiling to
postal abbreviations, 8.6 fonts and, 5.1 send to manuscript editor, 2.10
preface, 3.1 of foreign-language publications, 7.29 redundant expressions, App. G
premium publishing, 1 of lists, 5.33–.35 reference lists
print coordinator’s role, 2.18 of mathematical expressions, 5.11, author names in, 16.2
probability and statistics, 15.13 15.17–.23 for boxes, 12.7
proceedings of conferences. See with quotation marks, 5.2, 10.9 distinguished from
informally published works of titles, 7.20 bibliographies, 3.4, 16.5
production editor typography for, 5.1 placement of, 3.1, 3.4, 16.4, 16.42
additional rounds of review and, of URLs, 6.1 source documentation, 4.2, 16.42
2.11, 2.38 regional vice presidencies
approval of final pages and, 2.18 Q (“Regions”), 7.4
compilation of corrections by, 2.15 quality control check, 2.50, App. A.8 abbreviation of, 8.3
figures and illustrations, flow of, 2.19–.22 quantities capitalization of, 7.5
information and instructions abbreviation of, 9.7 confusion with geographic
provided by, 2.5–.7 numerical expression of, 9.1 place names, 7.12
information provided by, 2.11, 2.30 queries, 2.48. See also author queries regions of world. See geographic terms
managing editorial process by, 2.5–.29 question marks, 5.17–.18 regression tables, 14.12
materials to be provided by, 2.5–.7 in indirect questions, 5.18 “Rep.” abbreviation, use of, 7.13
to manuscript editor, 2.5, 2.30 within sentence, 5.17 reprint permissions. See permissions
to proofreader, 2.7, 2.46 question within a sentence, 5.17 review process. See client of
to typesetter, 2.6 quotation marks World Bank; editorial process

178 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


run-in lists, 5.33 source lines. See also permissions column heads, 14.4, 14.9–.12
word division of, 7.45 figures, 13.21 “continued” lines, 14.4
run-in quotations, 10.4 maps, 13.25 decimals in, 14.19
photographs, 13.26 editorial process for, 2.26–.29, 2.44, 2.45
S tables, 4.2, 14.21 FY in, 9.18
sample publication, production editor special characters. See symbols indexing of, 17.2
to provide, 2.5, 2.7, 2.30, 2.46 spelling. See also transliteration; word long tables, 14.4
schedule provided by production treatment notes within, 14.20, 14.22–.24
editor, 2.5–.7, 2.30, 2.46 of computer-related terms, 7.34 general note, 14.23
second page proofs, 2.4, 2.17, 2.50. of organization names, 7.8 order of, 14.22
See also page proofs of titles, 7.20 source notes, 14.21
semicolon square brackets. See brackets specific notes, 14.24
in foreign subtitles, 7.29 stacked heads, 11.2 numbering of, 14.3
in parenthetical source citations, 5.16 states, postal abbreviations for, 8.6 percent symbol in, 9.9
between two subtitles, 7.18 statistics, 9.1, 15.13 placement of, 12.8
sentences in bulleted lists, 5.35 sticky notes for queries, 2.48 slash to indicate “per” in, 5.32
sentence-style capitalization. strategies source line, 4.2
See capitalization capitalization of, 7.6 punctuation of, 5.29
serial comma, 5.6 organizations other than stub entries, 14.13–.17
series World Bank, 7.10 capitalization of, 14.13
examples of source citations, 16.21 stub entries in tables, 14.13–.17 content of, 14.16
information, 3.1 style sheet main entries and subentries, 14.17
series information, 3.1 production editor to provide, 2.5–.7, order of, 14.14
shortened titles, 7.21 2.30, 2.46 unit indicators, 14.15
single quotation marks, 10.8 sample, App. A.2a–.2b within text boxes, 12.5
slash, 5.30–.32 subscripts and superscripts titles of, 14.5, 14.6
with alternatives, 5.30 in mathematical unit indicators, 14.7, 14.8, 14.15
for “per,” 5.32 expressions, 15.6, 15.27 vertical, 14.4
with years, 5.31, 9.18 in notes. See notes World Bank as source, 14.21
social media as source Substantive Editing Checklist, App. A.1 templates, 2.6
documentation, 16.13, 16.38 subtitles text. See also specific elements
source documentation, 16.1–.42 with colon, 7.18 boxes. See text boxes
author-date style, 4.2, 16.2 of English-language publications, 7.18 editing of, 2.34–.40
background papers as, 16.31 in figure titles, 13.6 headings. See headings
bibliographies. See bibliographies of foreign-language publications, 7.29 indexing of, 17.2
blogs, 16.38 superscripts. See subscripts placement and order of, 3.1
citations, 16.2, 16.3 and superscripts production flow of, 2.8–.18
conference papers as, 16.29–.30 in notes. See notes references to figures, 13.2
copublications, 16.10 symbols revisions to
databases as. See database citations of currency types, 9.13, 9.14 client’s revisions, 2.39
electronic publications, 16.18, 16.34–.42 em dash, 5.22 incorporation of, 2.4, 2.40
e-mail as, 16.13 en dash, 5.23 proofreader’s revisions, 2.48
em dash for repeated author names, 16.7 in mathematical expressions, 15.3 sources. See source documentation
examples, 16.15–.42 minus sign, 5.24, 15.22 text boxes, 12.1–.8
figures, 13.21, 13.23 multiplication sign, 5.5, 15.21, 15.23 citing sources for, 12.7
informal publications, 16.11, percent symbol, 9.9 coding text material for, 2.32
16.28–.32, 16.37 in tables, 14.8, 14.11, 14.12, 14.18 figures not framed by, 13.16
legal citations, 16.12 trademark symbols, 7.15 graphics within, 12.5
minimum information needed, 16.6 in unit indicator indexing of, 17.2
multiple authors, 16.2, 16.8 in figure, 13.9 length of, 12.2
names of authors, 16.7 in table, 14.8 multiple panels of figures in, 12.5, 13.6
news releases as, 16.31 notes within, 12.6
notes, 4.2, 16.3 T numbering of, 12.3
organizations as authors, 16.2 table of contents, 2.5, 2.30, 3.2 numbering of figures in, 13.3
page numbers included in, 16.2 placement of, 3.1 numbering of tables in, 14.3
periodicals as, 16.25–.27, 16.35–.36 tables, 14.1–.24. See also graphics placement in text, 2.32, 12.8
permissions, 4.2 abbreviation in reference to, within text, 12.1
personal communications as, 16.13 numerical unit, 9.7 shortening of, 12.2
placement of, 3.4, 16.42 region names, 7.12 source documentation, 4.2
public documents as, 16.12, 16.33 “Rep.,” 7.13 titles of, 12.4
reference lists. See reference lists UK or US, 8.5 “the” as initial word
social media as, 16.13, 16.38 blank cells in, 14.18 of acronym or initialism, 8.7
websites as, 16.41 body of, 14.18–.20 of title, 7.22
working papers as, 16.28 broadside, 14.4 three dots. See ellipses

World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020 179


title page, 3.1 U boxes, placement in, 2.32, 12.8
titles of axes, 13.13, 13.14 UK, use of, 8.5 client changes in, 2.9
titles of chapters United Kingdom Comments feature not to be used, 2.36
as first level of text, 11.1 abbreviation of, 8.5 edited manuscript with
punctuation of, 7.19 billions, 9.12 edits accepted, 2.8
titles of figures, 13.4–.6 United States editing and approval procedures, 2.8–.18
titles of tables, 14.5, 14.6 abbreviation of, 8.5 em dash character, 5.22
titles of text boxes, 12.4 postal abbreviations for states, 8.6 en dash character, 5.23
titles of works, 7.16–.32 unit indicators formatting instructions, App. A.3
articles, chapters, feature stories, etc., 7.19 in figures, 13.7–.9 production editor’s tracked
blogs, 7.27 in tables, 14.7, 14.8, 14.11 changes in, 2.10
changes to, 7.20 units of World Bank. See also tables, editing of, 2.26, 2.44
database titles, 7.26 World Bank Group tracking changes in. See redlining
English-language electronic capitalization of, 7.5 word treatment, 7.1–.49, App. F
publications, 7.25–.27 structure of, 7.2–.7 alternative words and phrases, App. G
English-language print unpublished works, 7.23, 16.11 computer-related terms, 7.34
publications, 7.16–.24 URLs medical terms, 7.36
foreign-language publications, 7.28–.32 access dates, 6.3 names, 7.2–.32
informally published works, 7.23, 16.11 full address with http: or URLs, 7.35
newspaper titles, 7.22 https:, 6.4, 7.35 word division, 7.41–.49
not to be used for subject of work, 7.17 for informal electronic World Bank terms, 7.33
numbers spelled out in, 11.6 publications, 16.34 working papers. See informally published
public documents, 7.24 line breaks and, 6.2 works; unpublished works
shortened titles, 7.21 protocol in name, 7.35 World Bank client. See client of
source citations, 16.9 punctuation of, 6.1 World Bank
subtitles, 7.18 in source information, 6.5, 16.34 World Bank data, 4.2
unpublished works, 7.23, 16.11 word division of, 7.46 in figures, 13.21
websites and web pages, 7.27 US, use of, 8.5 photographs from World Bank, 13.26
tracking feature. See redlining in tables, 14.21
trademark symbols, 7.15 V World Bank Group
translation vendors in editorial process, 2.4 capitalization of initiatives,
brackets and parentheses, vertical lists, 5.34 loans, programs, projects,
use of, 5.25, 7.9 vice presidential units (VPUs) and strategies, 7.6
of foreign-language terms, 7.39 capitalization of, 7.5 capitalization of unit names, 7.5
of foreign organization names, 7.9 structure of, 7.4–.5 Cross-Cutting Solutions Areas
of foreign publication names, 7.31 (CCSAs), 7.3
transliteration W Global Practices (GPs), 7.3
of organizational names, 7.9 web-based publications. See electronic references to, 7.2–.7, 13.21
of publication names, 7.30 publications vice presidential regions, 7.4–.5
treatment of, 7.40 web pages and websites written permissions, 4.1
typesetter source documentation, 16.41
file transmission spelling of “website” and X
figures, 2.4 “web page,” 7.34 x as multiplication sign, 15.23
figures and illustrations, 2.19, 2.20 titles of, 7.27 x-axis. See axes in figures
math, 2.4, 2.23 word division, 7.41–.49
tables, 2.4, 2.27 of abbreviations, 7.44 Y
text, 2.6, 2.12 authority for, 7.41 y-axis. See axes in figures
materials to be provided to, 2.6 of e-mail addresses, 7.46 years in dates. See date format
minus sign, instruction for, 5.24, 15.22 of mathematical expressions, 7.47 years of age, 9.20
revised page proofs provided by, 2.16 of numerals, 7.43 yellow highlighting, author
role of, 2.4 of personal names, 7.42 queries in, 2.36
transmission of compiled of proper nouns, 7.42
changes to, 2.16 of run-in lists, 7.45 Z
typesetting transmittal forms, 2.6 typographic considerations, 7.48 zero
typographic considerations of URLs, 7.46 in axes, 13.11
for punctuation, 5.1 Word files leading zero in decimal
word division and, 7.48 all changes accepted, 2.37 factions, 9.10, 14.19

180 World Bank Group Publications Editorial Style Guide | 2020


SKU 33304

You might also like